47

Albatross - Regs QB

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

Albatross - Regs QB

Citation preview

Page 1: Albatross - Regs QB

AIR REGULATIONSshy ~

From Stllirufus Question CBanli fl-4 qufranwapoundJ Jlppt

J43fltJc~1Jilfgs ljgtUri~ftw t[)IOii-ll001g

The air traffic service which prevents the collision between aircraft is called

a) b) cV

Alerting service Flightinfonnation serviCe Air traffic control service

2 Prior to take- off the responsibility to check the serviceability of radio equipment lies with the -- -y

a) Commander of aircraft b) Radio operator c) Co-pilot

The authority to detain an aircraft is given in which document

a) Rule 8 of aircraft rules 1937 Section 8 of aircraft act 1934bull b)

c) OGCA circular nO8

4 Aer9drome broadcasting service is provided by

a) OGCA b Controller of Aerodromes

Qcl7 ~trort Authorjtydf India

If an aircraft makes a non precision approach the viSibility minima~wlicabie is

a) Given by the operator if filed by the operator with the OGCA b) DGCA minima if no minima is filed by the operator with the OGCA

c Both are correct--

middot6 The visibility minima for Take Off if the aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) Skm b) 27k~

c) 37 km

7 The runway threshold lights are

fa Green b Blue c) Amber d) White

8middot The threshold of runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines upJor takeoffmiddot b) That points on the beginnin~()f runway used for landing

c) The beginning of the runway

9 A VFR flight can lane at a controlled aerodrome if visibility is

9810363214

suriruferaviatoryafioocoin

2

a) 15 Jltm -sr more middot~ b) 37 km or more

c) 5 km or more

10 The starboard navigation light)s

Green 110 deg from ahead to the left Green 110 deg from ahead to the right Green 110 deg from behind to the right

11 The displaced threshold lights are

~ Green Blue

c) Amber

12 The duty time of the trainee pilot

gt A is calculated by the FDTv-shyb) is not affected by FDTL c) FOTL is applicable for scheduled flights only

13 A fresh iiight plan is required if at a controlied aerodiOma a scheduled night is delayed by

a) 2hrs b) 1 hrs c) 30m~

14 Longitudinal separation between aircraft flying at the Sam~ level amp on the same track ~ - -

a) 15 mts b) 10 mts ifnavigational aids permit frequent determination of position amp speed

Both are correct ~ A

15 The endurance of aircraft is

a) flight fuel + fuel for 45 minutes b) flight fuel + fuel to alternate + fuel for 45 minutes c) flight fuel + fuel to alternate + fuel for holding for 30 minutes + contingency

fuel

16 Track (M) is 200 the flight level to flying the quad rental rule is a) 160

b) 50 c) 75 ygt 80

~bull

11 While transiteing from quad rental system to semicircular system the aircraft should

v1i) cfimb by 500 ~

feet--middotshyb) descend by 500 feetX c) no change in flight level is require if RT contact is maintained

18 While transiting from semicircular system to quadrantal system the aircraft should

a) climb by 500 feet I

A5j descend by 500 feetmiddot shyc) no change in flight level is require if RT contact is maintained

-19 After being deared to land an aircraft fails to land within 5 minutes of the estimated time of landing It is termed as

a) distress phase ~ alertpbase a) INCERFA b) Search phase

Ao Area of Matnura refinery is a

a) Danger area f5f Prohibited area

Restricted area

21 The minimum distance an aircraft can f1yfrom-intemaoonalbor-defts

~ 15nm 20nm

c) 10nm

22 The controi area which is in the vicinity of one or more aerodromes is called a

~ Control area b) Control zone c) Aerodromes control area

23 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to

a) all aircraft registered in India b) all airctaft registered in India amp Military aircraft ampState aircraft amp State aircraft

4 aircraft whether registered in India or not except Military aircraft amp State aircraft

d) aU aircraft whether registered in India or not

24 Aerodrome operation minima is given by the

a) OGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by DGCALd) India Met Department

25 For carriage of arms ampammunition on board an aircraft

a) permission from DGCA is required b) permission from Army HQ is required

-pound permission from Central Govt is required d) permission from operator is required

26 For flights of foreign military aircraft aver India clearance is required from

a) central Govt

4

b) OGCA ~ Air Heaaquarters

27 The Ai~ft Act 1934 is applicable to whole of India ana is applied to

a ~itizen of India wherever they may be b) To and to persons on board ale required in India where they may be

28 The aircraft registered in C~tegory A belong to

COl-3)L b) a (ompany Qr corporation regd in India and having principle place of

business in India and its chairman with atleast 213 of directors are COl

29 A~rial work aircraft means an ac usedfoC individ~~LplfrpQS~s but does not include publicmiddottransport - --- ~-gt

--lt bull _

~-hru --30 Petroleum in bulk- means fuel in receptacle more than 900 Jbamp in capacity

31 The minimum age for the issue of CPL IS 18 years

32 The maximum number of landings by a pilot in one day

a) is not restricted for trainin9 fiying b) but if training is conducted after a scheduled flight the maximum number of

landings is six c) for a scheduled flight maximum of six landings

~__-_all are correct

33 A pilot involved in an aircraft acCident can ~tart flying again

a) When ever detailed by the operator _ lt When cleared by the OGCA for flying after a corrective flying training if~ necessary

c) When ever he is medically fit

The operational control consists oLinitiation continuation termination and division of a flight

--35 A Cessna 152 amp a Boeing 737 are on a converging course at same altitude Which aircraft has the right of way

a) Ught aircraft (Cessna 152) b) Heavier aircraft (Boeing 737)

The aircraft on the rightY 36 ATIS is a repetitive and continuous broadcast of VHF which gives METAR

and status ~f non visuallanding aids ATIS AJo~middotc TeJ ~~L~ ~hk

Flying an aircraft in a manner to cause danger to a person or property is punishable with

a) Imprisonment up to two months or fine or both --shyb) Imprisonment up to six months or fine or both c) imprisonment up to two months or fine of Rs 1000- or both

Imprisonment up to ~ix months or fine of Rs 1000- or both~ -

shy

--

5

38 For f1yinga non scheduled aircraft of foreign registration n to India for non traffic purposes the permission must be obtained from

a) ICAO OGCA~

c) Aerodrome officer of the airport of landing d) An officer authorized by the ~ntral Govt

39 During a night cross-country on relative bearing of 270 you see the red light if an aircraft

a) You turn right to avoid collision b) Turn leftto~avoid the collision

There s no fear of collisiollft 40 VFR Flying below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled aerodromethe ViSIbility is

c a) 15Km

5000 meters 8000 meters

41 The aerodrome operating minima is given by

Operator amp approved by DGCA b) OGCA c) AAI

v-42 A series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 sec means

Distress

~

A b) Urgency c) Indication ofdanger

43 $eries of green flashes directed towards an aircraft means

a) Clear to Take Off b) Clear for landing

Clear to Taxi shyret

44 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft can be tempered with or shifted to

a) Extricate persons or animals whether alive or dead b) Bring it to a place of safety c) Prevent inconvenienceotstruction to public

All are correctf v--45 The maximum flying a pilot can do in one year is

A 1000 hrs b) 1500 hrs c) 1200hrs

46 When an aircraft is being refueled the refueling must be stopped if a jet aircraft crosses with in a distance of

~

6

a) 15 meters b) 30 meters

- 43 meters~

d) 45 meters

47 Anti collision lights are mandatory for

at Aircraft AUWgt 5700 Kg b) Aircraft AUW gt 1500 Kg c) Any aircraft carrying passengers d) All aircraft

48 Instrument flight time is

a) All flight time in IFR AU flying time when the flying is done only with reference to) instruments

c) Only when flying in clouds

A9 Area of operation where no ADC is required

a) Local flying area A1f Within 5 nm of an aerodrome c) Control zone d) Control area

50 What information is to be iocluded in the third ~ection of an Air report

a) Air Temperature Icing Turbulence b) Spot Windlcing Cloud above

Spot Wind Air Temperature Icing Tubul~nce1 vS1 Navigation chargesare baSed upon

a) Airspeed b) Flying time over India A)VJ AU U Ue~- 1 -amp ~

- c) Distance flown I D -etr AUW

52 Destruction of buildings amp trees on approach path is mentioned in

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft rules 1954

c) Aircraft rules 1976 d) Aircraft rules 1996

53 Lateral separation to be maintained when crossing a holding point

15 nm from the Nav aid ~ 5 minutes

c) 5 nm from the Nay aid

On an international flight the maximum number of hours flown and the number of

landings in a day are

fr 913 b) 84

]- shy

c 63

55 A unit set up to provide air traffic control for aerodrome traffic is

c-aJ Aerodrome control service b) Aerodrome control tower c) Area control service

The most effective way to use eves at night is

a) Focus only at dim lights at a distance b) Flutter eyes rapidly

1 Scan slowly to center off vision Focus only on bright lights

57 when approaching to land on a flat darkened or flat snow covered surface the approach might appear to be

ar High - )~

b Steep

A Shallow d) Low

58 A portion of the airport reserved for loading off loading of cargo passengersparJciog of aircraft amp for small maintenance except for taxiing is called

A Apron b Movement area c) Maneuvering area d) Taxiway

59 The flight duty time limitations are raid down in

a) Aircraft manual b) Aircraft Rules 1937

AIC AehJgt~~ ~~~ ((~Lu~ d) As in a amp the maximum daty time for domestic operations is limited to 11

hours

vAiO Minimum rest period after domestic flight duty is

a) Twice the duty time performed b) Twice the flight time performed

As in b but not less than 8 hours71 61 The maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 30 days

ar~

a) 100

Ig 125 80

d) 120

reg The Maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 7 days are

a) 30

8

b) 50 c) 40 d) 25

63 At an aerodrome the aerobatics can becarried out above 6000 feet

A

a) Beyond 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome b) Beyond 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

Within 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome d) Within 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

64 Flying in Danger area is

a) Prohibited b) Permitted above a certain flight level

A Allowed if permitted by A TC ~

d) Allowed if permitted by DGCA

65 Flying in an aircraft below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled airspace the minimum horizontal separation from clouds is

~

a) 300 meters b) 500 meters

1500 meters 1500 feet

66 An aircraft wants to indicate tne difficulties which eompel to land without requiring assistance will do so by

a) firing red pyrotechnically lights b) firing red amp green pyrotechnically lights

firing white pyrotechnically lights or by repeated switching ON amp OFF-of ~ the LandinJ light of navigation ligh~

67 Aircraft is helding North amp sees green navigation lightof another aircraft at a relative bearing of045 the aircraft

~

a) are on a collision course rr are not on a collision course

c) Could be on a collision course

~68 Above f1~ght level 290 the vertical clearance between aircrafts on reciprocal tracks is

a) 1000 feet ff 2000 feet c) 4000 feet

Lateral separation using VOR is

15 degat distance of more than 15 nm~ b) 30 deg at distance of more than 15 nm c) 10 deg at distance of more than 15 nm

70 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft 6n RNJ can be removed

a) extricate dead animal amp persons

71

Z2

73

74

75

L77

78

79

9

~v extriclte animals amp persons dead or alive c) to pennit movement of other aircraft

An aircraft lands atan uncontrolled aerodrome can take off again

a) with the permission of OGCA A without any permission of PGCA

c) only if there is no injUy-loany onemiddot

Changes in the aeronautical services which are likely to last for more than 2 hr~ aremiddot given in NOTAMS

Series AA b) Series B c) SeriesG

On board a civil aircraft the Airl=orce Army Navy personnel can

a) not carry arms at all h carry arms with the pennission of DGCA

sarry anns with the permissjonolcentraJGovlA )lt

Aircraft incident must be reported with in

a) 24 hrs b) -36 hrs

-48 hrs(1shyAn aircraft accident is to be reported with in

24 hrs~ 36 hrs

c) 46 hrsmiddotmiddot

An aircraft in circuit encounters RIT failure how will the pilot acknowledge the light signals received by him

a) The pilot will pitch the nose up and down -1)) The pilot will rock wings

c) The pilot will switch onoff the landing lights

Petroleum in bulk means

a) Petroleum in receptacle of 900 Lit shy)i( Petroleum in ~ceptacJe ofmore than 900 Ut~ c) Petroleum in receptacle of less than 900 Lit

o

Red Pyrotechnical light given to an aircraft in flight by the Control tower means

a) Keep circling and give way to another aircraft b) You can land here at this aerodrome

$dr4 Not withstanding previous instruction do not land for the time being d) means nothing to an aircraft in air

Incubation period for Relapsing Fever

10

a) Eight days b) Six days - shyc) Four days

---

If there is a patientmiddot on board suffering from any Quarantinable decease the ri~ commander will send a health report to the health officer w

- ~~

a) b c

A)

48 Hrs prior to the arrival t~ ul~ ~ 4 Hrs prior to the arrival VLecL ~ b-e3 Hrs prior to the arrival -shy2 Hrs prior to the arrival is () t 4 f-~~

~81 A person who has died of Yellow Fever needs to be brought to India

if The body can hot be brought to India b) The body can only be brought provided it is hermetically sealed c) Provided the body is preserved in a wooden box d Provided the body is enclosed in a zinc box

~82_ Either hand along with the palm downwards and placed level with the chest and when moved laterally means

CuUhe engines(A b) Slowdown c) ChOCKS away d) Means nothing

-----83_ Operational Manual is

----a) Prepared by the manufacture and auth06zed by operator b) Prepared by DGCA and authorized by the operator c) Prepared by the operator and authorized-by manufaclurer

Prepared by the operator and authorized by the DGCAr-A -84 Any prisoner can be carried abroad or Qnboard any aircraft only if

a) The prisoner is accompanied by anmiddotarmed guard Permitted by the DGCA in writingP1

~ c) Permitted by the District Magistrate d Permitted by the Commissioner of police

-85 Leaflets containing printed matter can only be dropped from any aircrafti motion if

Permitted by the DIst Magistrate or The Commissioner of PolicemiddotA b) Permitted by the OGCA c) Permitted by the DDGCA d) Permitted by the ORampL

An aircraft is commencing descend from its initial FL 290 over Palam-Airport The altimeter reads 12000 ft The commander will report his ertical distance to the ATe in terms of

12000 Altitude_

~ FL 120 c) FL 290

It

d) 29000 Altitude

An aircraft is following 020 TrM The choice of FL available to the pilot are

1 507090150110190210230250270290370410450 55759515517519521523 5255275295

c) 507090110130160180200220240260280

)(88 An ai~craft is following 220Tr(M) as per the quadrental rule the pilot must Choose FL between

a) 119-269 b) 269-359

180-26Y 090-180

89 An aircraft is flying 5000 AMSL outside a control airspace The commander must fly at all times under

a) Aerodrome control

~ FL5Chshy5000 as Altitude

d 5000 as Height

90 For the FACILITIES the pilot should refer to

a) AIC b NOTAM

AtPlt5 NOTAM CODES

91 A fresh flight pl~n is required when

a) a f1~ght is delayed for take off

controlled fiight is delayedfgty more than 30 minutes a controlled flight is delayed by more than 60 minutes

d an- un-controlled flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes

91 Photography at an aerodrome tan be permitted by

a) DGCAJDDGCA D(gt~ )~LI b) Director of regulation amp inspection (DRampI)

c) Controller of aerodromes rltI All

92 No member of the operation crew shall consume any alcoholic drink or narcotic drug with in a period of12 Hours before1Jight amp during ffighL

A3 Epileptic patients can be canied on board provided they are accompanied by an attendanL

94 While refueling an aircraft no naked flame is allowed within a distance oL 30 Vv--s

95 The largest polygon forming a danger zone around a refueling aircraft is _obtained by joining points ~mtrs away from the wing and the fueling vehicle

t lt J_ 1 _ MId)

shy

12

96 Except in an emergency dropping of articles from an aircraft isprohibited except basket of fine sand or waterbullbull

97 If the age of a cpt holder is more than 40 years the validity of medical is for bull 06 monttis bull bull (4Stfic4t

98 The~ of air worthiness can be suspended-or wi~drawnwhen

a) ac suffers major damage b acs~ffers major defect ~ c)pound unauthorized modifications carried out

V99 Pilots personal log book is to be preserved for 5 years from the last date of entry

A 00 ~e minimum height to be flown in hilly areas in IFR flight is bull2000 above the highest obstaclewithin a radius of 5 nm frQm the position of ac

--101 An aircraft flies away from base The daily inspection is valid for a period of 4 days or 12 hours of flying whichever is earlier

i02 50latkm percc for yellow fever is 06 days-----403 The thickness of transition layer is 1000J-1499 ~

104 middot The RVR is measured at a height of 16 FPTLmiddot

105 The an is applicable for

a scheduled flights only b) Scheduled flights amptraining flights

fl All flight -

~06 Over hilly areas IFR flights require a vertical clearance of

A 2000 feet with in 8 Km of the position oJ aircraft b) 2000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft c) 1000 feet with in 8 Km of the positiOn of aircraft d) 1000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft

107 Control of air traffic over an aerodrome below 3000 feet is by

a) approach control aerodrome control~

c) control area

108 Aerobatics should not be performed below

~ 2000 feet 5000 feet

c) 4000 feet

109 RfT signal for emergency is

a) security

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 2: Albatross - Regs QB

2

a) 15 Jltm -sr more middot~ b) 37 km or more

c) 5 km or more

10 The starboard navigation light)s

Green 110 deg from ahead to the left Green 110 deg from ahead to the right Green 110 deg from behind to the right

11 The displaced threshold lights are

~ Green Blue

c) Amber

12 The duty time of the trainee pilot

gt A is calculated by the FDTv-shyb) is not affected by FDTL c) FOTL is applicable for scheduled flights only

13 A fresh iiight plan is required if at a controlied aerodiOma a scheduled night is delayed by

a) 2hrs b) 1 hrs c) 30m~

14 Longitudinal separation between aircraft flying at the Sam~ level amp on the same track ~ - -

a) 15 mts b) 10 mts ifnavigational aids permit frequent determination of position amp speed

Both are correct ~ A

15 The endurance of aircraft is

a) flight fuel + fuel for 45 minutes b) flight fuel + fuel to alternate + fuel for 45 minutes c) flight fuel + fuel to alternate + fuel for holding for 30 minutes + contingency

fuel

16 Track (M) is 200 the flight level to flying the quad rental rule is a) 160

b) 50 c) 75 ygt 80

~bull

11 While transiteing from quad rental system to semicircular system the aircraft should

v1i) cfimb by 500 ~

feet--middotshyb) descend by 500 feetX c) no change in flight level is require if RT contact is maintained

18 While transiting from semicircular system to quadrantal system the aircraft should

a) climb by 500 feet I

A5j descend by 500 feetmiddot shyc) no change in flight level is require if RT contact is maintained

-19 After being deared to land an aircraft fails to land within 5 minutes of the estimated time of landing It is termed as

a) distress phase ~ alertpbase a) INCERFA b) Search phase

Ao Area of Matnura refinery is a

a) Danger area f5f Prohibited area

Restricted area

21 The minimum distance an aircraft can f1yfrom-intemaoonalbor-defts

~ 15nm 20nm

c) 10nm

22 The controi area which is in the vicinity of one or more aerodromes is called a

~ Control area b) Control zone c) Aerodromes control area

23 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to

a) all aircraft registered in India b) all airctaft registered in India amp Military aircraft ampState aircraft amp State aircraft

4 aircraft whether registered in India or not except Military aircraft amp State aircraft

d) aU aircraft whether registered in India or not

24 Aerodrome operation minima is given by the

a) OGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by DGCALd) India Met Department

25 For carriage of arms ampammunition on board an aircraft

a) permission from DGCA is required b) permission from Army HQ is required

-pound permission from Central Govt is required d) permission from operator is required

26 For flights of foreign military aircraft aver India clearance is required from

a) central Govt

4

b) OGCA ~ Air Heaaquarters

27 The Ai~ft Act 1934 is applicable to whole of India ana is applied to

a ~itizen of India wherever they may be b) To and to persons on board ale required in India where they may be

28 The aircraft registered in C~tegory A belong to

COl-3)L b) a (ompany Qr corporation regd in India and having principle place of

business in India and its chairman with atleast 213 of directors are COl

29 A~rial work aircraft means an ac usedfoC individ~~LplfrpQS~s but does not include publicmiddottransport - --- ~-gt

--lt bull _

~-hru --30 Petroleum in bulk- means fuel in receptacle more than 900 Jbamp in capacity

31 The minimum age for the issue of CPL IS 18 years

32 The maximum number of landings by a pilot in one day

a) is not restricted for trainin9 fiying b) but if training is conducted after a scheduled flight the maximum number of

landings is six c) for a scheduled flight maximum of six landings

~__-_all are correct

33 A pilot involved in an aircraft acCident can ~tart flying again

a) When ever detailed by the operator _ lt When cleared by the OGCA for flying after a corrective flying training if~ necessary

c) When ever he is medically fit

The operational control consists oLinitiation continuation termination and division of a flight

--35 A Cessna 152 amp a Boeing 737 are on a converging course at same altitude Which aircraft has the right of way

a) Ught aircraft (Cessna 152) b) Heavier aircraft (Boeing 737)

The aircraft on the rightY 36 ATIS is a repetitive and continuous broadcast of VHF which gives METAR

and status ~f non visuallanding aids ATIS AJo~middotc TeJ ~~L~ ~hk

Flying an aircraft in a manner to cause danger to a person or property is punishable with

a) Imprisonment up to two months or fine or both --shyb) Imprisonment up to six months or fine or both c) imprisonment up to two months or fine of Rs 1000- or both

Imprisonment up to ~ix months or fine of Rs 1000- or both~ -

shy

--

5

38 For f1yinga non scheduled aircraft of foreign registration n to India for non traffic purposes the permission must be obtained from

a) ICAO OGCA~

c) Aerodrome officer of the airport of landing d) An officer authorized by the ~ntral Govt

39 During a night cross-country on relative bearing of 270 you see the red light if an aircraft

a) You turn right to avoid collision b) Turn leftto~avoid the collision

There s no fear of collisiollft 40 VFR Flying below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled aerodromethe ViSIbility is

c a) 15Km

5000 meters 8000 meters

41 The aerodrome operating minima is given by

Operator amp approved by DGCA b) OGCA c) AAI

v-42 A series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 sec means

Distress

~

A b) Urgency c) Indication ofdanger

43 $eries of green flashes directed towards an aircraft means

a) Clear to Take Off b) Clear for landing

Clear to Taxi shyret

44 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft can be tempered with or shifted to

a) Extricate persons or animals whether alive or dead b) Bring it to a place of safety c) Prevent inconvenienceotstruction to public

All are correctf v--45 The maximum flying a pilot can do in one year is

A 1000 hrs b) 1500 hrs c) 1200hrs

46 When an aircraft is being refueled the refueling must be stopped if a jet aircraft crosses with in a distance of

~

6

a) 15 meters b) 30 meters

- 43 meters~

d) 45 meters

47 Anti collision lights are mandatory for

at Aircraft AUWgt 5700 Kg b) Aircraft AUW gt 1500 Kg c) Any aircraft carrying passengers d) All aircraft

48 Instrument flight time is

a) All flight time in IFR AU flying time when the flying is done only with reference to) instruments

c) Only when flying in clouds

A9 Area of operation where no ADC is required

a) Local flying area A1f Within 5 nm of an aerodrome c) Control zone d) Control area

50 What information is to be iocluded in the third ~ection of an Air report

a) Air Temperature Icing Turbulence b) Spot Windlcing Cloud above

Spot Wind Air Temperature Icing Tubul~nce1 vS1 Navigation chargesare baSed upon

a) Airspeed b) Flying time over India A)VJ AU U Ue~- 1 -amp ~

- c) Distance flown I D -etr AUW

52 Destruction of buildings amp trees on approach path is mentioned in

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft rules 1954

c) Aircraft rules 1976 d) Aircraft rules 1996

53 Lateral separation to be maintained when crossing a holding point

15 nm from the Nav aid ~ 5 minutes

c) 5 nm from the Nay aid

On an international flight the maximum number of hours flown and the number of

landings in a day are

fr 913 b) 84

]- shy

c 63

55 A unit set up to provide air traffic control for aerodrome traffic is

c-aJ Aerodrome control service b) Aerodrome control tower c) Area control service

The most effective way to use eves at night is

a) Focus only at dim lights at a distance b) Flutter eyes rapidly

1 Scan slowly to center off vision Focus only on bright lights

57 when approaching to land on a flat darkened or flat snow covered surface the approach might appear to be

ar High - )~

b Steep

A Shallow d) Low

58 A portion of the airport reserved for loading off loading of cargo passengersparJciog of aircraft amp for small maintenance except for taxiing is called

A Apron b Movement area c) Maneuvering area d) Taxiway

59 The flight duty time limitations are raid down in

a) Aircraft manual b) Aircraft Rules 1937

AIC AehJgt~~ ~~~ ((~Lu~ d) As in a amp the maximum daty time for domestic operations is limited to 11

hours

vAiO Minimum rest period after domestic flight duty is

a) Twice the duty time performed b) Twice the flight time performed

As in b but not less than 8 hours71 61 The maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 30 days

ar~

a) 100

Ig 125 80

d) 120

reg The Maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 7 days are

a) 30

8

b) 50 c) 40 d) 25

63 At an aerodrome the aerobatics can becarried out above 6000 feet

A

a) Beyond 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome b) Beyond 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

Within 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome d) Within 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

64 Flying in Danger area is

a) Prohibited b) Permitted above a certain flight level

A Allowed if permitted by A TC ~

d) Allowed if permitted by DGCA

65 Flying in an aircraft below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled airspace the minimum horizontal separation from clouds is

~

a) 300 meters b) 500 meters

1500 meters 1500 feet

66 An aircraft wants to indicate tne difficulties which eompel to land without requiring assistance will do so by

a) firing red pyrotechnically lights b) firing red amp green pyrotechnically lights

firing white pyrotechnically lights or by repeated switching ON amp OFF-of ~ the LandinJ light of navigation ligh~

67 Aircraft is helding North amp sees green navigation lightof another aircraft at a relative bearing of045 the aircraft

~

a) are on a collision course rr are not on a collision course

c) Could be on a collision course

~68 Above f1~ght level 290 the vertical clearance between aircrafts on reciprocal tracks is

a) 1000 feet ff 2000 feet c) 4000 feet

Lateral separation using VOR is

15 degat distance of more than 15 nm~ b) 30 deg at distance of more than 15 nm c) 10 deg at distance of more than 15 nm

70 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft 6n RNJ can be removed

a) extricate dead animal amp persons

71

Z2

73

74

75

L77

78

79

9

~v extriclte animals amp persons dead or alive c) to pennit movement of other aircraft

An aircraft lands atan uncontrolled aerodrome can take off again

a) with the permission of OGCA A without any permission of PGCA

c) only if there is no injUy-loany onemiddot

Changes in the aeronautical services which are likely to last for more than 2 hr~ aremiddot given in NOTAMS

Series AA b) Series B c) SeriesG

On board a civil aircraft the Airl=orce Army Navy personnel can

a) not carry arms at all h carry arms with the pennission of DGCA

sarry anns with the permissjonolcentraJGovlA )lt

Aircraft incident must be reported with in

a) 24 hrs b) -36 hrs

-48 hrs(1shyAn aircraft accident is to be reported with in

24 hrs~ 36 hrs

c) 46 hrsmiddotmiddot

An aircraft in circuit encounters RIT failure how will the pilot acknowledge the light signals received by him

a) The pilot will pitch the nose up and down -1)) The pilot will rock wings

c) The pilot will switch onoff the landing lights

Petroleum in bulk means

a) Petroleum in receptacle of 900 Lit shy)i( Petroleum in ~ceptacJe ofmore than 900 Ut~ c) Petroleum in receptacle of less than 900 Lit

o

Red Pyrotechnical light given to an aircraft in flight by the Control tower means

a) Keep circling and give way to another aircraft b) You can land here at this aerodrome

$dr4 Not withstanding previous instruction do not land for the time being d) means nothing to an aircraft in air

Incubation period for Relapsing Fever

10

a) Eight days b) Six days - shyc) Four days

---

If there is a patientmiddot on board suffering from any Quarantinable decease the ri~ commander will send a health report to the health officer w

- ~~

a) b c

A)

48 Hrs prior to the arrival t~ ul~ ~ 4 Hrs prior to the arrival VLecL ~ b-e3 Hrs prior to the arrival -shy2 Hrs prior to the arrival is () t 4 f-~~

~81 A person who has died of Yellow Fever needs to be brought to India

if The body can hot be brought to India b) The body can only be brought provided it is hermetically sealed c) Provided the body is preserved in a wooden box d Provided the body is enclosed in a zinc box

~82_ Either hand along with the palm downwards and placed level with the chest and when moved laterally means

CuUhe engines(A b) Slowdown c) ChOCKS away d) Means nothing

-----83_ Operational Manual is

----a) Prepared by the manufacture and auth06zed by operator b) Prepared by DGCA and authorized by the operator c) Prepared by the operator and authorized-by manufaclurer

Prepared by the operator and authorized by the DGCAr-A -84 Any prisoner can be carried abroad or Qnboard any aircraft only if

a) The prisoner is accompanied by anmiddotarmed guard Permitted by the DGCA in writingP1

~ c) Permitted by the District Magistrate d Permitted by the Commissioner of police

-85 Leaflets containing printed matter can only be dropped from any aircrafti motion if

Permitted by the DIst Magistrate or The Commissioner of PolicemiddotA b) Permitted by the OGCA c) Permitted by the DDGCA d) Permitted by the ORampL

An aircraft is commencing descend from its initial FL 290 over Palam-Airport The altimeter reads 12000 ft The commander will report his ertical distance to the ATe in terms of

12000 Altitude_

~ FL 120 c) FL 290

It

d) 29000 Altitude

An aircraft is following 020 TrM The choice of FL available to the pilot are

1 507090150110190210230250270290370410450 55759515517519521523 5255275295

c) 507090110130160180200220240260280

)(88 An ai~craft is following 220Tr(M) as per the quadrental rule the pilot must Choose FL between

a) 119-269 b) 269-359

180-26Y 090-180

89 An aircraft is flying 5000 AMSL outside a control airspace The commander must fly at all times under

a) Aerodrome control

~ FL5Chshy5000 as Altitude

d 5000 as Height

90 For the FACILITIES the pilot should refer to

a) AIC b NOTAM

AtPlt5 NOTAM CODES

91 A fresh flight pl~n is required when

a) a f1~ght is delayed for take off

controlled fiight is delayedfgty more than 30 minutes a controlled flight is delayed by more than 60 minutes

d an- un-controlled flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes

91 Photography at an aerodrome tan be permitted by

a) DGCAJDDGCA D(gt~ )~LI b) Director of regulation amp inspection (DRampI)

c) Controller of aerodromes rltI All

92 No member of the operation crew shall consume any alcoholic drink or narcotic drug with in a period of12 Hours before1Jight amp during ffighL

A3 Epileptic patients can be canied on board provided they are accompanied by an attendanL

94 While refueling an aircraft no naked flame is allowed within a distance oL 30 Vv--s

95 The largest polygon forming a danger zone around a refueling aircraft is _obtained by joining points ~mtrs away from the wing and the fueling vehicle

t lt J_ 1 _ MId)

shy

12

96 Except in an emergency dropping of articles from an aircraft isprohibited except basket of fine sand or waterbullbull

97 If the age of a cpt holder is more than 40 years the validity of medical is for bull 06 monttis bull bull (4Stfic4t

98 The~ of air worthiness can be suspended-or wi~drawnwhen

a) ac suffers major damage b acs~ffers major defect ~ c)pound unauthorized modifications carried out

V99 Pilots personal log book is to be preserved for 5 years from the last date of entry

A 00 ~e minimum height to be flown in hilly areas in IFR flight is bull2000 above the highest obstaclewithin a radius of 5 nm frQm the position of ac

--101 An aircraft flies away from base The daily inspection is valid for a period of 4 days or 12 hours of flying whichever is earlier

i02 50latkm percc for yellow fever is 06 days-----403 The thickness of transition layer is 1000J-1499 ~

104 middot The RVR is measured at a height of 16 FPTLmiddot

105 The an is applicable for

a scheduled flights only b) Scheduled flights amptraining flights

fl All flight -

~06 Over hilly areas IFR flights require a vertical clearance of

A 2000 feet with in 8 Km of the position oJ aircraft b) 2000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft c) 1000 feet with in 8 Km of the positiOn of aircraft d) 1000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft

107 Control of air traffic over an aerodrome below 3000 feet is by

a) approach control aerodrome control~

c) control area

108 Aerobatics should not be performed below

~ 2000 feet 5000 feet

c) 4000 feet

109 RfT signal for emergency is

a) security

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 3: Albatross - Regs QB

a) climb by 500 feet I

A5j descend by 500 feetmiddot shyc) no change in flight level is require if RT contact is maintained

-19 After being deared to land an aircraft fails to land within 5 minutes of the estimated time of landing It is termed as

a) distress phase ~ alertpbase a) INCERFA b) Search phase

Ao Area of Matnura refinery is a

a) Danger area f5f Prohibited area

Restricted area

21 The minimum distance an aircraft can f1yfrom-intemaoonalbor-defts

~ 15nm 20nm

c) 10nm

22 The controi area which is in the vicinity of one or more aerodromes is called a

~ Control area b) Control zone c) Aerodromes control area

23 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to

a) all aircraft registered in India b) all airctaft registered in India amp Military aircraft ampState aircraft amp State aircraft

4 aircraft whether registered in India or not except Military aircraft amp State aircraft

d) aU aircraft whether registered in India or not

24 Aerodrome operation minima is given by the

a) OGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by DGCALd) India Met Department

25 For carriage of arms ampammunition on board an aircraft

a) permission from DGCA is required b) permission from Army HQ is required

-pound permission from Central Govt is required d) permission from operator is required

26 For flights of foreign military aircraft aver India clearance is required from

a) central Govt

4

b) OGCA ~ Air Heaaquarters

27 The Ai~ft Act 1934 is applicable to whole of India ana is applied to

a ~itizen of India wherever they may be b) To and to persons on board ale required in India where they may be

28 The aircraft registered in C~tegory A belong to

COl-3)L b) a (ompany Qr corporation regd in India and having principle place of

business in India and its chairman with atleast 213 of directors are COl

29 A~rial work aircraft means an ac usedfoC individ~~LplfrpQS~s but does not include publicmiddottransport - --- ~-gt

--lt bull _

~-hru --30 Petroleum in bulk- means fuel in receptacle more than 900 Jbamp in capacity

31 The minimum age for the issue of CPL IS 18 years

32 The maximum number of landings by a pilot in one day

a) is not restricted for trainin9 fiying b) but if training is conducted after a scheduled flight the maximum number of

landings is six c) for a scheduled flight maximum of six landings

~__-_all are correct

33 A pilot involved in an aircraft acCident can ~tart flying again

a) When ever detailed by the operator _ lt When cleared by the OGCA for flying after a corrective flying training if~ necessary

c) When ever he is medically fit

The operational control consists oLinitiation continuation termination and division of a flight

--35 A Cessna 152 amp a Boeing 737 are on a converging course at same altitude Which aircraft has the right of way

a) Ught aircraft (Cessna 152) b) Heavier aircraft (Boeing 737)

The aircraft on the rightY 36 ATIS is a repetitive and continuous broadcast of VHF which gives METAR

and status ~f non visuallanding aids ATIS AJo~middotc TeJ ~~L~ ~hk

Flying an aircraft in a manner to cause danger to a person or property is punishable with

a) Imprisonment up to two months or fine or both --shyb) Imprisonment up to six months or fine or both c) imprisonment up to two months or fine of Rs 1000- or both

Imprisonment up to ~ix months or fine of Rs 1000- or both~ -

shy

--

5

38 For f1yinga non scheduled aircraft of foreign registration n to India for non traffic purposes the permission must be obtained from

a) ICAO OGCA~

c) Aerodrome officer of the airport of landing d) An officer authorized by the ~ntral Govt

39 During a night cross-country on relative bearing of 270 you see the red light if an aircraft

a) You turn right to avoid collision b) Turn leftto~avoid the collision

There s no fear of collisiollft 40 VFR Flying below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled aerodromethe ViSIbility is

c a) 15Km

5000 meters 8000 meters

41 The aerodrome operating minima is given by

Operator amp approved by DGCA b) OGCA c) AAI

v-42 A series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 sec means

Distress

~

A b) Urgency c) Indication ofdanger

43 $eries of green flashes directed towards an aircraft means

a) Clear to Take Off b) Clear for landing

Clear to Taxi shyret

44 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft can be tempered with or shifted to

a) Extricate persons or animals whether alive or dead b) Bring it to a place of safety c) Prevent inconvenienceotstruction to public

All are correctf v--45 The maximum flying a pilot can do in one year is

A 1000 hrs b) 1500 hrs c) 1200hrs

46 When an aircraft is being refueled the refueling must be stopped if a jet aircraft crosses with in a distance of

~

6

a) 15 meters b) 30 meters

- 43 meters~

d) 45 meters

47 Anti collision lights are mandatory for

at Aircraft AUWgt 5700 Kg b) Aircraft AUW gt 1500 Kg c) Any aircraft carrying passengers d) All aircraft

48 Instrument flight time is

a) All flight time in IFR AU flying time when the flying is done only with reference to) instruments

c) Only when flying in clouds

A9 Area of operation where no ADC is required

a) Local flying area A1f Within 5 nm of an aerodrome c) Control zone d) Control area

50 What information is to be iocluded in the third ~ection of an Air report

a) Air Temperature Icing Turbulence b) Spot Windlcing Cloud above

Spot Wind Air Temperature Icing Tubul~nce1 vS1 Navigation chargesare baSed upon

a) Airspeed b) Flying time over India A)VJ AU U Ue~- 1 -amp ~

- c) Distance flown I D -etr AUW

52 Destruction of buildings amp trees on approach path is mentioned in

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft rules 1954

c) Aircraft rules 1976 d) Aircraft rules 1996

53 Lateral separation to be maintained when crossing a holding point

15 nm from the Nav aid ~ 5 minutes

c) 5 nm from the Nay aid

On an international flight the maximum number of hours flown and the number of

landings in a day are

fr 913 b) 84

]- shy

c 63

55 A unit set up to provide air traffic control for aerodrome traffic is

c-aJ Aerodrome control service b) Aerodrome control tower c) Area control service

The most effective way to use eves at night is

a) Focus only at dim lights at a distance b) Flutter eyes rapidly

1 Scan slowly to center off vision Focus only on bright lights

57 when approaching to land on a flat darkened or flat snow covered surface the approach might appear to be

ar High - )~

b Steep

A Shallow d) Low

58 A portion of the airport reserved for loading off loading of cargo passengersparJciog of aircraft amp for small maintenance except for taxiing is called

A Apron b Movement area c) Maneuvering area d) Taxiway

59 The flight duty time limitations are raid down in

a) Aircraft manual b) Aircraft Rules 1937

AIC AehJgt~~ ~~~ ((~Lu~ d) As in a amp the maximum daty time for domestic operations is limited to 11

hours

vAiO Minimum rest period after domestic flight duty is

a) Twice the duty time performed b) Twice the flight time performed

As in b but not less than 8 hours71 61 The maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 30 days

ar~

a) 100

Ig 125 80

d) 120

reg The Maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 7 days are

a) 30

8

b) 50 c) 40 d) 25

63 At an aerodrome the aerobatics can becarried out above 6000 feet

A

a) Beyond 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome b) Beyond 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

Within 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome d) Within 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

64 Flying in Danger area is

a) Prohibited b) Permitted above a certain flight level

A Allowed if permitted by A TC ~

d) Allowed if permitted by DGCA

65 Flying in an aircraft below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled airspace the minimum horizontal separation from clouds is

~

a) 300 meters b) 500 meters

1500 meters 1500 feet

66 An aircraft wants to indicate tne difficulties which eompel to land without requiring assistance will do so by

a) firing red pyrotechnically lights b) firing red amp green pyrotechnically lights

firing white pyrotechnically lights or by repeated switching ON amp OFF-of ~ the LandinJ light of navigation ligh~

67 Aircraft is helding North amp sees green navigation lightof another aircraft at a relative bearing of045 the aircraft

~

a) are on a collision course rr are not on a collision course

c) Could be on a collision course

~68 Above f1~ght level 290 the vertical clearance between aircrafts on reciprocal tracks is

a) 1000 feet ff 2000 feet c) 4000 feet

Lateral separation using VOR is

15 degat distance of more than 15 nm~ b) 30 deg at distance of more than 15 nm c) 10 deg at distance of more than 15 nm

70 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft 6n RNJ can be removed

a) extricate dead animal amp persons

71

Z2

73

74

75

L77

78

79

9

~v extriclte animals amp persons dead or alive c) to pennit movement of other aircraft

An aircraft lands atan uncontrolled aerodrome can take off again

a) with the permission of OGCA A without any permission of PGCA

c) only if there is no injUy-loany onemiddot

Changes in the aeronautical services which are likely to last for more than 2 hr~ aremiddot given in NOTAMS

Series AA b) Series B c) SeriesG

On board a civil aircraft the Airl=orce Army Navy personnel can

a) not carry arms at all h carry arms with the pennission of DGCA

sarry anns with the permissjonolcentraJGovlA )lt

Aircraft incident must be reported with in

a) 24 hrs b) -36 hrs

-48 hrs(1shyAn aircraft accident is to be reported with in

24 hrs~ 36 hrs

c) 46 hrsmiddotmiddot

An aircraft in circuit encounters RIT failure how will the pilot acknowledge the light signals received by him

a) The pilot will pitch the nose up and down -1)) The pilot will rock wings

c) The pilot will switch onoff the landing lights

Petroleum in bulk means

a) Petroleum in receptacle of 900 Lit shy)i( Petroleum in ~ceptacJe ofmore than 900 Ut~ c) Petroleum in receptacle of less than 900 Lit

o

Red Pyrotechnical light given to an aircraft in flight by the Control tower means

a) Keep circling and give way to another aircraft b) You can land here at this aerodrome

$dr4 Not withstanding previous instruction do not land for the time being d) means nothing to an aircraft in air

Incubation period for Relapsing Fever

10

a) Eight days b) Six days - shyc) Four days

---

If there is a patientmiddot on board suffering from any Quarantinable decease the ri~ commander will send a health report to the health officer w

- ~~

a) b c

A)

48 Hrs prior to the arrival t~ ul~ ~ 4 Hrs prior to the arrival VLecL ~ b-e3 Hrs prior to the arrival -shy2 Hrs prior to the arrival is () t 4 f-~~

~81 A person who has died of Yellow Fever needs to be brought to India

if The body can hot be brought to India b) The body can only be brought provided it is hermetically sealed c) Provided the body is preserved in a wooden box d Provided the body is enclosed in a zinc box

~82_ Either hand along with the palm downwards and placed level with the chest and when moved laterally means

CuUhe engines(A b) Slowdown c) ChOCKS away d) Means nothing

-----83_ Operational Manual is

----a) Prepared by the manufacture and auth06zed by operator b) Prepared by DGCA and authorized by the operator c) Prepared by the operator and authorized-by manufaclurer

Prepared by the operator and authorized by the DGCAr-A -84 Any prisoner can be carried abroad or Qnboard any aircraft only if

a) The prisoner is accompanied by anmiddotarmed guard Permitted by the DGCA in writingP1

~ c) Permitted by the District Magistrate d Permitted by the Commissioner of police

-85 Leaflets containing printed matter can only be dropped from any aircrafti motion if

Permitted by the DIst Magistrate or The Commissioner of PolicemiddotA b) Permitted by the OGCA c) Permitted by the DDGCA d) Permitted by the ORampL

An aircraft is commencing descend from its initial FL 290 over Palam-Airport The altimeter reads 12000 ft The commander will report his ertical distance to the ATe in terms of

12000 Altitude_

~ FL 120 c) FL 290

It

d) 29000 Altitude

An aircraft is following 020 TrM The choice of FL available to the pilot are

1 507090150110190210230250270290370410450 55759515517519521523 5255275295

c) 507090110130160180200220240260280

)(88 An ai~craft is following 220Tr(M) as per the quadrental rule the pilot must Choose FL between

a) 119-269 b) 269-359

180-26Y 090-180

89 An aircraft is flying 5000 AMSL outside a control airspace The commander must fly at all times under

a) Aerodrome control

~ FL5Chshy5000 as Altitude

d 5000 as Height

90 For the FACILITIES the pilot should refer to

a) AIC b NOTAM

AtPlt5 NOTAM CODES

91 A fresh flight pl~n is required when

a) a f1~ght is delayed for take off

controlled fiight is delayedfgty more than 30 minutes a controlled flight is delayed by more than 60 minutes

d an- un-controlled flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes

91 Photography at an aerodrome tan be permitted by

a) DGCAJDDGCA D(gt~ )~LI b) Director of regulation amp inspection (DRampI)

c) Controller of aerodromes rltI All

92 No member of the operation crew shall consume any alcoholic drink or narcotic drug with in a period of12 Hours before1Jight amp during ffighL

A3 Epileptic patients can be canied on board provided they are accompanied by an attendanL

94 While refueling an aircraft no naked flame is allowed within a distance oL 30 Vv--s

95 The largest polygon forming a danger zone around a refueling aircraft is _obtained by joining points ~mtrs away from the wing and the fueling vehicle

t lt J_ 1 _ MId)

shy

12

96 Except in an emergency dropping of articles from an aircraft isprohibited except basket of fine sand or waterbullbull

97 If the age of a cpt holder is more than 40 years the validity of medical is for bull 06 monttis bull bull (4Stfic4t

98 The~ of air worthiness can be suspended-or wi~drawnwhen

a) ac suffers major damage b acs~ffers major defect ~ c)pound unauthorized modifications carried out

V99 Pilots personal log book is to be preserved for 5 years from the last date of entry

A 00 ~e minimum height to be flown in hilly areas in IFR flight is bull2000 above the highest obstaclewithin a radius of 5 nm frQm the position of ac

--101 An aircraft flies away from base The daily inspection is valid for a period of 4 days or 12 hours of flying whichever is earlier

i02 50latkm percc for yellow fever is 06 days-----403 The thickness of transition layer is 1000J-1499 ~

104 middot The RVR is measured at a height of 16 FPTLmiddot

105 The an is applicable for

a scheduled flights only b) Scheduled flights amptraining flights

fl All flight -

~06 Over hilly areas IFR flights require a vertical clearance of

A 2000 feet with in 8 Km of the position oJ aircraft b) 2000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft c) 1000 feet with in 8 Km of the positiOn of aircraft d) 1000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft

107 Control of air traffic over an aerodrome below 3000 feet is by

a) approach control aerodrome control~

c) control area

108 Aerobatics should not be performed below

~ 2000 feet 5000 feet

c) 4000 feet

109 RfT signal for emergency is

a) security

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 4: Albatross - Regs QB

4

b) OGCA ~ Air Heaaquarters

27 The Ai~ft Act 1934 is applicable to whole of India ana is applied to

a ~itizen of India wherever they may be b) To and to persons on board ale required in India where they may be

28 The aircraft registered in C~tegory A belong to

COl-3)L b) a (ompany Qr corporation regd in India and having principle place of

business in India and its chairman with atleast 213 of directors are COl

29 A~rial work aircraft means an ac usedfoC individ~~LplfrpQS~s but does not include publicmiddottransport - --- ~-gt

--lt bull _

~-hru --30 Petroleum in bulk- means fuel in receptacle more than 900 Jbamp in capacity

31 The minimum age for the issue of CPL IS 18 years

32 The maximum number of landings by a pilot in one day

a) is not restricted for trainin9 fiying b) but if training is conducted after a scheduled flight the maximum number of

landings is six c) for a scheduled flight maximum of six landings

~__-_all are correct

33 A pilot involved in an aircraft acCident can ~tart flying again

a) When ever detailed by the operator _ lt When cleared by the OGCA for flying after a corrective flying training if~ necessary

c) When ever he is medically fit

The operational control consists oLinitiation continuation termination and division of a flight

--35 A Cessna 152 amp a Boeing 737 are on a converging course at same altitude Which aircraft has the right of way

a) Ught aircraft (Cessna 152) b) Heavier aircraft (Boeing 737)

The aircraft on the rightY 36 ATIS is a repetitive and continuous broadcast of VHF which gives METAR

and status ~f non visuallanding aids ATIS AJo~middotc TeJ ~~L~ ~hk

Flying an aircraft in a manner to cause danger to a person or property is punishable with

a) Imprisonment up to two months or fine or both --shyb) Imprisonment up to six months or fine or both c) imprisonment up to two months or fine of Rs 1000- or both

Imprisonment up to ~ix months or fine of Rs 1000- or both~ -

shy

--

5

38 For f1yinga non scheduled aircraft of foreign registration n to India for non traffic purposes the permission must be obtained from

a) ICAO OGCA~

c) Aerodrome officer of the airport of landing d) An officer authorized by the ~ntral Govt

39 During a night cross-country on relative bearing of 270 you see the red light if an aircraft

a) You turn right to avoid collision b) Turn leftto~avoid the collision

There s no fear of collisiollft 40 VFR Flying below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled aerodromethe ViSIbility is

c a) 15Km

5000 meters 8000 meters

41 The aerodrome operating minima is given by

Operator amp approved by DGCA b) OGCA c) AAI

v-42 A series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 sec means

Distress

~

A b) Urgency c) Indication ofdanger

43 $eries of green flashes directed towards an aircraft means

a) Clear to Take Off b) Clear for landing

Clear to Taxi shyret

44 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft can be tempered with or shifted to

a) Extricate persons or animals whether alive or dead b) Bring it to a place of safety c) Prevent inconvenienceotstruction to public

All are correctf v--45 The maximum flying a pilot can do in one year is

A 1000 hrs b) 1500 hrs c) 1200hrs

46 When an aircraft is being refueled the refueling must be stopped if a jet aircraft crosses with in a distance of

~

6

a) 15 meters b) 30 meters

- 43 meters~

d) 45 meters

47 Anti collision lights are mandatory for

at Aircraft AUWgt 5700 Kg b) Aircraft AUW gt 1500 Kg c) Any aircraft carrying passengers d) All aircraft

48 Instrument flight time is

a) All flight time in IFR AU flying time when the flying is done only with reference to) instruments

c) Only when flying in clouds

A9 Area of operation where no ADC is required

a) Local flying area A1f Within 5 nm of an aerodrome c) Control zone d) Control area

50 What information is to be iocluded in the third ~ection of an Air report

a) Air Temperature Icing Turbulence b) Spot Windlcing Cloud above

Spot Wind Air Temperature Icing Tubul~nce1 vS1 Navigation chargesare baSed upon

a) Airspeed b) Flying time over India A)VJ AU U Ue~- 1 -amp ~

- c) Distance flown I D -etr AUW

52 Destruction of buildings amp trees on approach path is mentioned in

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft rules 1954

c) Aircraft rules 1976 d) Aircraft rules 1996

53 Lateral separation to be maintained when crossing a holding point

15 nm from the Nav aid ~ 5 minutes

c) 5 nm from the Nay aid

On an international flight the maximum number of hours flown and the number of

landings in a day are

fr 913 b) 84

]- shy

c 63

55 A unit set up to provide air traffic control for aerodrome traffic is

c-aJ Aerodrome control service b) Aerodrome control tower c) Area control service

The most effective way to use eves at night is

a) Focus only at dim lights at a distance b) Flutter eyes rapidly

1 Scan slowly to center off vision Focus only on bright lights

57 when approaching to land on a flat darkened or flat snow covered surface the approach might appear to be

ar High - )~

b Steep

A Shallow d) Low

58 A portion of the airport reserved for loading off loading of cargo passengersparJciog of aircraft amp for small maintenance except for taxiing is called

A Apron b Movement area c) Maneuvering area d) Taxiway

59 The flight duty time limitations are raid down in

a) Aircraft manual b) Aircraft Rules 1937

AIC AehJgt~~ ~~~ ((~Lu~ d) As in a amp the maximum daty time for domestic operations is limited to 11

hours

vAiO Minimum rest period after domestic flight duty is

a) Twice the duty time performed b) Twice the flight time performed

As in b but not less than 8 hours71 61 The maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 30 days

ar~

a) 100

Ig 125 80

d) 120

reg The Maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 7 days are

a) 30

8

b) 50 c) 40 d) 25

63 At an aerodrome the aerobatics can becarried out above 6000 feet

A

a) Beyond 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome b) Beyond 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

Within 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome d) Within 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

64 Flying in Danger area is

a) Prohibited b) Permitted above a certain flight level

A Allowed if permitted by A TC ~

d) Allowed if permitted by DGCA

65 Flying in an aircraft below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled airspace the minimum horizontal separation from clouds is

~

a) 300 meters b) 500 meters

1500 meters 1500 feet

66 An aircraft wants to indicate tne difficulties which eompel to land without requiring assistance will do so by

a) firing red pyrotechnically lights b) firing red amp green pyrotechnically lights

firing white pyrotechnically lights or by repeated switching ON amp OFF-of ~ the LandinJ light of navigation ligh~

67 Aircraft is helding North amp sees green navigation lightof another aircraft at a relative bearing of045 the aircraft

~

a) are on a collision course rr are not on a collision course

c) Could be on a collision course

~68 Above f1~ght level 290 the vertical clearance between aircrafts on reciprocal tracks is

a) 1000 feet ff 2000 feet c) 4000 feet

Lateral separation using VOR is

15 degat distance of more than 15 nm~ b) 30 deg at distance of more than 15 nm c) 10 deg at distance of more than 15 nm

70 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft 6n RNJ can be removed

a) extricate dead animal amp persons

71

Z2

73

74

75

L77

78

79

9

~v extriclte animals amp persons dead or alive c) to pennit movement of other aircraft

An aircraft lands atan uncontrolled aerodrome can take off again

a) with the permission of OGCA A without any permission of PGCA

c) only if there is no injUy-loany onemiddot

Changes in the aeronautical services which are likely to last for more than 2 hr~ aremiddot given in NOTAMS

Series AA b) Series B c) SeriesG

On board a civil aircraft the Airl=orce Army Navy personnel can

a) not carry arms at all h carry arms with the pennission of DGCA

sarry anns with the permissjonolcentraJGovlA )lt

Aircraft incident must be reported with in

a) 24 hrs b) -36 hrs

-48 hrs(1shyAn aircraft accident is to be reported with in

24 hrs~ 36 hrs

c) 46 hrsmiddotmiddot

An aircraft in circuit encounters RIT failure how will the pilot acknowledge the light signals received by him

a) The pilot will pitch the nose up and down -1)) The pilot will rock wings

c) The pilot will switch onoff the landing lights

Petroleum in bulk means

a) Petroleum in receptacle of 900 Lit shy)i( Petroleum in ~ceptacJe ofmore than 900 Ut~ c) Petroleum in receptacle of less than 900 Lit

o

Red Pyrotechnical light given to an aircraft in flight by the Control tower means

a) Keep circling and give way to another aircraft b) You can land here at this aerodrome

$dr4 Not withstanding previous instruction do not land for the time being d) means nothing to an aircraft in air

Incubation period for Relapsing Fever

10

a) Eight days b) Six days - shyc) Four days

---

If there is a patientmiddot on board suffering from any Quarantinable decease the ri~ commander will send a health report to the health officer w

- ~~

a) b c

A)

48 Hrs prior to the arrival t~ ul~ ~ 4 Hrs prior to the arrival VLecL ~ b-e3 Hrs prior to the arrival -shy2 Hrs prior to the arrival is () t 4 f-~~

~81 A person who has died of Yellow Fever needs to be brought to India

if The body can hot be brought to India b) The body can only be brought provided it is hermetically sealed c) Provided the body is preserved in a wooden box d Provided the body is enclosed in a zinc box

~82_ Either hand along with the palm downwards and placed level with the chest and when moved laterally means

CuUhe engines(A b) Slowdown c) ChOCKS away d) Means nothing

-----83_ Operational Manual is

----a) Prepared by the manufacture and auth06zed by operator b) Prepared by DGCA and authorized by the operator c) Prepared by the operator and authorized-by manufaclurer

Prepared by the operator and authorized by the DGCAr-A -84 Any prisoner can be carried abroad or Qnboard any aircraft only if

a) The prisoner is accompanied by anmiddotarmed guard Permitted by the DGCA in writingP1

~ c) Permitted by the District Magistrate d Permitted by the Commissioner of police

-85 Leaflets containing printed matter can only be dropped from any aircrafti motion if

Permitted by the DIst Magistrate or The Commissioner of PolicemiddotA b) Permitted by the OGCA c) Permitted by the DDGCA d) Permitted by the ORampL

An aircraft is commencing descend from its initial FL 290 over Palam-Airport The altimeter reads 12000 ft The commander will report his ertical distance to the ATe in terms of

12000 Altitude_

~ FL 120 c) FL 290

It

d) 29000 Altitude

An aircraft is following 020 TrM The choice of FL available to the pilot are

1 507090150110190210230250270290370410450 55759515517519521523 5255275295

c) 507090110130160180200220240260280

)(88 An ai~craft is following 220Tr(M) as per the quadrental rule the pilot must Choose FL between

a) 119-269 b) 269-359

180-26Y 090-180

89 An aircraft is flying 5000 AMSL outside a control airspace The commander must fly at all times under

a) Aerodrome control

~ FL5Chshy5000 as Altitude

d 5000 as Height

90 For the FACILITIES the pilot should refer to

a) AIC b NOTAM

AtPlt5 NOTAM CODES

91 A fresh flight pl~n is required when

a) a f1~ght is delayed for take off

controlled fiight is delayedfgty more than 30 minutes a controlled flight is delayed by more than 60 minutes

d an- un-controlled flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes

91 Photography at an aerodrome tan be permitted by

a) DGCAJDDGCA D(gt~ )~LI b) Director of regulation amp inspection (DRampI)

c) Controller of aerodromes rltI All

92 No member of the operation crew shall consume any alcoholic drink or narcotic drug with in a period of12 Hours before1Jight amp during ffighL

A3 Epileptic patients can be canied on board provided they are accompanied by an attendanL

94 While refueling an aircraft no naked flame is allowed within a distance oL 30 Vv--s

95 The largest polygon forming a danger zone around a refueling aircraft is _obtained by joining points ~mtrs away from the wing and the fueling vehicle

t lt J_ 1 _ MId)

shy

12

96 Except in an emergency dropping of articles from an aircraft isprohibited except basket of fine sand or waterbullbull

97 If the age of a cpt holder is more than 40 years the validity of medical is for bull 06 monttis bull bull (4Stfic4t

98 The~ of air worthiness can be suspended-or wi~drawnwhen

a) ac suffers major damage b acs~ffers major defect ~ c)pound unauthorized modifications carried out

V99 Pilots personal log book is to be preserved for 5 years from the last date of entry

A 00 ~e minimum height to be flown in hilly areas in IFR flight is bull2000 above the highest obstaclewithin a radius of 5 nm frQm the position of ac

--101 An aircraft flies away from base The daily inspection is valid for a period of 4 days or 12 hours of flying whichever is earlier

i02 50latkm percc for yellow fever is 06 days-----403 The thickness of transition layer is 1000J-1499 ~

104 middot The RVR is measured at a height of 16 FPTLmiddot

105 The an is applicable for

a scheduled flights only b) Scheduled flights amptraining flights

fl All flight -

~06 Over hilly areas IFR flights require a vertical clearance of

A 2000 feet with in 8 Km of the position oJ aircraft b) 2000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft c) 1000 feet with in 8 Km of the positiOn of aircraft d) 1000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft

107 Control of air traffic over an aerodrome below 3000 feet is by

a) approach control aerodrome control~

c) control area

108 Aerobatics should not be performed below

~ 2000 feet 5000 feet

c) 4000 feet

109 RfT signal for emergency is

a) security

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 5: Albatross - Regs QB

5

38 For f1yinga non scheduled aircraft of foreign registration n to India for non traffic purposes the permission must be obtained from

a) ICAO OGCA~

c) Aerodrome officer of the airport of landing d) An officer authorized by the ~ntral Govt

39 During a night cross-country on relative bearing of 270 you see the red light if an aircraft

a) You turn right to avoid collision b) Turn leftto~avoid the collision

There s no fear of collisiollft 40 VFR Flying below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled aerodromethe ViSIbility is

c a) 15Km

5000 meters 8000 meters

41 The aerodrome operating minima is given by

Operator amp approved by DGCA b) OGCA c) AAI

v-42 A series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 sec means

Distress

~

A b) Urgency c) Indication ofdanger

43 $eries of green flashes directed towards an aircraft means

a) Clear to Take Off b) Clear for landing

Clear to Taxi shyret

44 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft can be tempered with or shifted to

a) Extricate persons or animals whether alive or dead b) Bring it to a place of safety c) Prevent inconvenienceotstruction to public

All are correctf v--45 The maximum flying a pilot can do in one year is

A 1000 hrs b) 1500 hrs c) 1200hrs

46 When an aircraft is being refueled the refueling must be stopped if a jet aircraft crosses with in a distance of

~

6

a) 15 meters b) 30 meters

- 43 meters~

d) 45 meters

47 Anti collision lights are mandatory for

at Aircraft AUWgt 5700 Kg b) Aircraft AUW gt 1500 Kg c) Any aircraft carrying passengers d) All aircraft

48 Instrument flight time is

a) All flight time in IFR AU flying time when the flying is done only with reference to) instruments

c) Only when flying in clouds

A9 Area of operation where no ADC is required

a) Local flying area A1f Within 5 nm of an aerodrome c) Control zone d) Control area

50 What information is to be iocluded in the third ~ection of an Air report

a) Air Temperature Icing Turbulence b) Spot Windlcing Cloud above

Spot Wind Air Temperature Icing Tubul~nce1 vS1 Navigation chargesare baSed upon

a) Airspeed b) Flying time over India A)VJ AU U Ue~- 1 -amp ~

- c) Distance flown I D -etr AUW

52 Destruction of buildings amp trees on approach path is mentioned in

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft rules 1954

c) Aircraft rules 1976 d) Aircraft rules 1996

53 Lateral separation to be maintained when crossing a holding point

15 nm from the Nav aid ~ 5 minutes

c) 5 nm from the Nay aid

On an international flight the maximum number of hours flown and the number of

landings in a day are

fr 913 b) 84

]- shy

c 63

55 A unit set up to provide air traffic control for aerodrome traffic is

c-aJ Aerodrome control service b) Aerodrome control tower c) Area control service

The most effective way to use eves at night is

a) Focus only at dim lights at a distance b) Flutter eyes rapidly

1 Scan slowly to center off vision Focus only on bright lights

57 when approaching to land on a flat darkened or flat snow covered surface the approach might appear to be

ar High - )~

b Steep

A Shallow d) Low

58 A portion of the airport reserved for loading off loading of cargo passengersparJciog of aircraft amp for small maintenance except for taxiing is called

A Apron b Movement area c) Maneuvering area d) Taxiway

59 The flight duty time limitations are raid down in

a) Aircraft manual b) Aircraft Rules 1937

AIC AehJgt~~ ~~~ ((~Lu~ d) As in a amp the maximum daty time for domestic operations is limited to 11

hours

vAiO Minimum rest period after domestic flight duty is

a) Twice the duty time performed b) Twice the flight time performed

As in b but not less than 8 hours71 61 The maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 30 days

ar~

a) 100

Ig 125 80

d) 120

reg The Maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 7 days are

a) 30

8

b) 50 c) 40 d) 25

63 At an aerodrome the aerobatics can becarried out above 6000 feet

A

a) Beyond 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome b) Beyond 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

Within 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome d) Within 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

64 Flying in Danger area is

a) Prohibited b) Permitted above a certain flight level

A Allowed if permitted by A TC ~

d) Allowed if permitted by DGCA

65 Flying in an aircraft below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled airspace the minimum horizontal separation from clouds is

~

a) 300 meters b) 500 meters

1500 meters 1500 feet

66 An aircraft wants to indicate tne difficulties which eompel to land without requiring assistance will do so by

a) firing red pyrotechnically lights b) firing red amp green pyrotechnically lights

firing white pyrotechnically lights or by repeated switching ON amp OFF-of ~ the LandinJ light of navigation ligh~

67 Aircraft is helding North amp sees green navigation lightof another aircraft at a relative bearing of045 the aircraft

~

a) are on a collision course rr are not on a collision course

c) Could be on a collision course

~68 Above f1~ght level 290 the vertical clearance between aircrafts on reciprocal tracks is

a) 1000 feet ff 2000 feet c) 4000 feet

Lateral separation using VOR is

15 degat distance of more than 15 nm~ b) 30 deg at distance of more than 15 nm c) 10 deg at distance of more than 15 nm

70 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft 6n RNJ can be removed

a) extricate dead animal amp persons

71

Z2

73

74

75

L77

78

79

9

~v extriclte animals amp persons dead or alive c) to pennit movement of other aircraft

An aircraft lands atan uncontrolled aerodrome can take off again

a) with the permission of OGCA A without any permission of PGCA

c) only if there is no injUy-loany onemiddot

Changes in the aeronautical services which are likely to last for more than 2 hr~ aremiddot given in NOTAMS

Series AA b) Series B c) SeriesG

On board a civil aircraft the Airl=orce Army Navy personnel can

a) not carry arms at all h carry arms with the pennission of DGCA

sarry anns with the permissjonolcentraJGovlA )lt

Aircraft incident must be reported with in

a) 24 hrs b) -36 hrs

-48 hrs(1shyAn aircraft accident is to be reported with in

24 hrs~ 36 hrs

c) 46 hrsmiddotmiddot

An aircraft in circuit encounters RIT failure how will the pilot acknowledge the light signals received by him

a) The pilot will pitch the nose up and down -1)) The pilot will rock wings

c) The pilot will switch onoff the landing lights

Petroleum in bulk means

a) Petroleum in receptacle of 900 Lit shy)i( Petroleum in ~ceptacJe ofmore than 900 Ut~ c) Petroleum in receptacle of less than 900 Lit

o

Red Pyrotechnical light given to an aircraft in flight by the Control tower means

a) Keep circling and give way to another aircraft b) You can land here at this aerodrome

$dr4 Not withstanding previous instruction do not land for the time being d) means nothing to an aircraft in air

Incubation period for Relapsing Fever

10

a) Eight days b) Six days - shyc) Four days

---

If there is a patientmiddot on board suffering from any Quarantinable decease the ri~ commander will send a health report to the health officer w

- ~~

a) b c

A)

48 Hrs prior to the arrival t~ ul~ ~ 4 Hrs prior to the arrival VLecL ~ b-e3 Hrs prior to the arrival -shy2 Hrs prior to the arrival is () t 4 f-~~

~81 A person who has died of Yellow Fever needs to be brought to India

if The body can hot be brought to India b) The body can only be brought provided it is hermetically sealed c) Provided the body is preserved in a wooden box d Provided the body is enclosed in a zinc box

~82_ Either hand along with the palm downwards and placed level with the chest and when moved laterally means

CuUhe engines(A b) Slowdown c) ChOCKS away d) Means nothing

-----83_ Operational Manual is

----a) Prepared by the manufacture and auth06zed by operator b) Prepared by DGCA and authorized by the operator c) Prepared by the operator and authorized-by manufaclurer

Prepared by the operator and authorized by the DGCAr-A -84 Any prisoner can be carried abroad or Qnboard any aircraft only if

a) The prisoner is accompanied by anmiddotarmed guard Permitted by the DGCA in writingP1

~ c) Permitted by the District Magistrate d Permitted by the Commissioner of police

-85 Leaflets containing printed matter can only be dropped from any aircrafti motion if

Permitted by the DIst Magistrate or The Commissioner of PolicemiddotA b) Permitted by the OGCA c) Permitted by the DDGCA d) Permitted by the ORampL

An aircraft is commencing descend from its initial FL 290 over Palam-Airport The altimeter reads 12000 ft The commander will report his ertical distance to the ATe in terms of

12000 Altitude_

~ FL 120 c) FL 290

It

d) 29000 Altitude

An aircraft is following 020 TrM The choice of FL available to the pilot are

1 507090150110190210230250270290370410450 55759515517519521523 5255275295

c) 507090110130160180200220240260280

)(88 An ai~craft is following 220Tr(M) as per the quadrental rule the pilot must Choose FL between

a) 119-269 b) 269-359

180-26Y 090-180

89 An aircraft is flying 5000 AMSL outside a control airspace The commander must fly at all times under

a) Aerodrome control

~ FL5Chshy5000 as Altitude

d 5000 as Height

90 For the FACILITIES the pilot should refer to

a) AIC b NOTAM

AtPlt5 NOTAM CODES

91 A fresh flight pl~n is required when

a) a f1~ght is delayed for take off

controlled fiight is delayedfgty more than 30 minutes a controlled flight is delayed by more than 60 minutes

d an- un-controlled flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes

91 Photography at an aerodrome tan be permitted by

a) DGCAJDDGCA D(gt~ )~LI b) Director of regulation amp inspection (DRampI)

c) Controller of aerodromes rltI All

92 No member of the operation crew shall consume any alcoholic drink or narcotic drug with in a period of12 Hours before1Jight amp during ffighL

A3 Epileptic patients can be canied on board provided they are accompanied by an attendanL

94 While refueling an aircraft no naked flame is allowed within a distance oL 30 Vv--s

95 The largest polygon forming a danger zone around a refueling aircraft is _obtained by joining points ~mtrs away from the wing and the fueling vehicle

t lt J_ 1 _ MId)

shy

12

96 Except in an emergency dropping of articles from an aircraft isprohibited except basket of fine sand or waterbullbull

97 If the age of a cpt holder is more than 40 years the validity of medical is for bull 06 monttis bull bull (4Stfic4t

98 The~ of air worthiness can be suspended-or wi~drawnwhen

a) ac suffers major damage b acs~ffers major defect ~ c)pound unauthorized modifications carried out

V99 Pilots personal log book is to be preserved for 5 years from the last date of entry

A 00 ~e minimum height to be flown in hilly areas in IFR flight is bull2000 above the highest obstaclewithin a radius of 5 nm frQm the position of ac

--101 An aircraft flies away from base The daily inspection is valid for a period of 4 days or 12 hours of flying whichever is earlier

i02 50latkm percc for yellow fever is 06 days-----403 The thickness of transition layer is 1000J-1499 ~

104 middot The RVR is measured at a height of 16 FPTLmiddot

105 The an is applicable for

a scheduled flights only b) Scheduled flights amptraining flights

fl All flight -

~06 Over hilly areas IFR flights require a vertical clearance of

A 2000 feet with in 8 Km of the position oJ aircraft b) 2000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft c) 1000 feet with in 8 Km of the positiOn of aircraft d) 1000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft

107 Control of air traffic over an aerodrome below 3000 feet is by

a) approach control aerodrome control~

c) control area

108 Aerobatics should not be performed below

~ 2000 feet 5000 feet

c) 4000 feet

109 RfT signal for emergency is

a) security

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 6: Albatross - Regs QB

~

6

a) 15 meters b) 30 meters

- 43 meters~

d) 45 meters

47 Anti collision lights are mandatory for

at Aircraft AUWgt 5700 Kg b) Aircraft AUW gt 1500 Kg c) Any aircraft carrying passengers d) All aircraft

48 Instrument flight time is

a) All flight time in IFR AU flying time when the flying is done only with reference to) instruments

c) Only when flying in clouds

A9 Area of operation where no ADC is required

a) Local flying area A1f Within 5 nm of an aerodrome c) Control zone d) Control area

50 What information is to be iocluded in the third ~ection of an Air report

a) Air Temperature Icing Turbulence b) Spot Windlcing Cloud above

Spot Wind Air Temperature Icing Tubul~nce1 vS1 Navigation chargesare baSed upon

a) Airspeed b) Flying time over India A)VJ AU U Ue~- 1 -amp ~

- c) Distance flown I D -etr AUW

52 Destruction of buildings amp trees on approach path is mentioned in

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft rules 1954

c) Aircraft rules 1976 d) Aircraft rules 1996

53 Lateral separation to be maintained when crossing a holding point

15 nm from the Nav aid ~ 5 minutes

c) 5 nm from the Nay aid

On an international flight the maximum number of hours flown and the number of

landings in a day are

fr 913 b) 84

]- shy

c 63

55 A unit set up to provide air traffic control for aerodrome traffic is

c-aJ Aerodrome control service b) Aerodrome control tower c) Area control service

The most effective way to use eves at night is

a) Focus only at dim lights at a distance b) Flutter eyes rapidly

1 Scan slowly to center off vision Focus only on bright lights

57 when approaching to land on a flat darkened or flat snow covered surface the approach might appear to be

ar High - )~

b Steep

A Shallow d) Low

58 A portion of the airport reserved for loading off loading of cargo passengersparJciog of aircraft amp for small maintenance except for taxiing is called

A Apron b Movement area c) Maneuvering area d) Taxiway

59 The flight duty time limitations are raid down in

a) Aircraft manual b) Aircraft Rules 1937

AIC AehJgt~~ ~~~ ((~Lu~ d) As in a amp the maximum daty time for domestic operations is limited to 11

hours

vAiO Minimum rest period after domestic flight duty is

a) Twice the duty time performed b) Twice the flight time performed

As in b but not less than 8 hours71 61 The maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 30 days

ar~

a) 100

Ig 125 80

d) 120

reg The Maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 7 days are

a) 30

8

b) 50 c) 40 d) 25

63 At an aerodrome the aerobatics can becarried out above 6000 feet

A

a) Beyond 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome b) Beyond 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

Within 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome d) Within 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

64 Flying in Danger area is

a) Prohibited b) Permitted above a certain flight level

A Allowed if permitted by A TC ~

d) Allowed if permitted by DGCA

65 Flying in an aircraft below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled airspace the minimum horizontal separation from clouds is

~

a) 300 meters b) 500 meters

1500 meters 1500 feet

66 An aircraft wants to indicate tne difficulties which eompel to land without requiring assistance will do so by

a) firing red pyrotechnically lights b) firing red amp green pyrotechnically lights

firing white pyrotechnically lights or by repeated switching ON amp OFF-of ~ the LandinJ light of navigation ligh~

67 Aircraft is helding North amp sees green navigation lightof another aircraft at a relative bearing of045 the aircraft

~

a) are on a collision course rr are not on a collision course

c) Could be on a collision course

~68 Above f1~ght level 290 the vertical clearance between aircrafts on reciprocal tracks is

a) 1000 feet ff 2000 feet c) 4000 feet

Lateral separation using VOR is

15 degat distance of more than 15 nm~ b) 30 deg at distance of more than 15 nm c) 10 deg at distance of more than 15 nm

70 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft 6n RNJ can be removed

a) extricate dead animal amp persons

71

Z2

73

74

75

L77

78

79

9

~v extriclte animals amp persons dead or alive c) to pennit movement of other aircraft

An aircraft lands atan uncontrolled aerodrome can take off again

a) with the permission of OGCA A without any permission of PGCA

c) only if there is no injUy-loany onemiddot

Changes in the aeronautical services which are likely to last for more than 2 hr~ aremiddot given in NOTAMS

Series AA b) Series B c) SeriesG

On board a civil aircraft the Airl=orce Army Navy personnel can

a) not carry arms at all h carry arms with the pennission of DGCA

sarry anns with the permissjonolcentraJGovlA )lt

Aircraft incident must be reported with in

a) 24 hrs b) -36 hrs

-48 hrs(1shyAn aircraft accident is to be reported with in

24 hrs~ 36 hrs

c) 46 hrsmiddotmiddot

An aircraft in circuit encounters RIT failure how will the pilot acknowledge the light signals received by him

a) The pilot will pitch the nose up and down -1)) The pilot will rock wings

c) The pilot will switch onoff the landing lights

Petroleum in bulk means

a) Petroleum in receptacle of 900 Lit shy)i( Petroleum in ~ceptacJe ofmore than 900 Ut~ c) Petroleum in receptacle of less than 900 Lit

o

Red Pyrotechnical light given to an aircraft in flight by the Control tower means

a) Keep circling and give way to another aircraft b) You can land here at this aerodrome

$dr4 Not withstanding previous instruction do not land for the time being d) means nothing to an aircraft in air

Incubation period for Relapsing Fever

10

a) Eight days b) Six days - shyc) Four days

---

If there is a patientmiddot on board suffering from any Quarantinable decease the ri~ commander will send a health report to the health officer w

- ~~

a) b c

A)

48 Hrs prior to the arrival t~ ul~ ~ 4 Hrs prior to the arrival VLecL ~ b-e3 Hrs prior to the arrival -shy2 Hrs prior to the arrival is () t 4 f-~~

~81 A person who has died of Yellow Fever needs to be brought to India

if The body can hot be brought to India b) The body can only be brought provided it is hermetically sealed c) Provided the body is preserved in a wooden box d Provided the body is enclosed in a zinc box

~82_ Either hand along with the palm downwards and placed level with the chest and when moved laterally means

CuUhe engines(A b) Slowdown c) ChOCKS away d) Means nothing

-----83_ Operational Manual is

----a) Prepared by the manufacture and auth06zed by operator b) Prepared by DGCA and authorized by the operator c) Prepared by the operator and authorized-by manufaclurer

Prepared by the operator and authorized by the DGCAr-A -84 Any prisoner can be carried abroad or Qnboard any aircraft only if

a) The prisoner is accompanied by anmiddotarmed guard Permitted by the DGCA in writingP1

~ c) Permitted by the District Magistrate d Permitted by the Commissioner of police

-85 Leaflets containing printed matter can only be dropped from any aircrafti motion if

Permitted by the DIst Magistrate or The Commissioner of PolicemiddotA b) Permitted by the OGCA c) Permitted by the DDGCA d) Permitted by the ORampL

An aircraft is commencing descend from its initial FL 290 over Palam-Airport The altimeter reads 12000 ft The commander will report his ertical distance to the ATe in terms of

12000 Altitude_

~ FL 120 c) FL 290

It

d) 29000 Altitude

An aircraft is following 020 TrM The choice of FL available to the pilot are

1 507090150110190210230250270290370410450 55759515517519521523 5255275295

c) 507090110130160180200220240260280

)(88 An ai~craft is following 220Tr(M) as per the quadrental rule the pilot must Choose FL between

a) 119-269 b) 269-359

180-26Y 090-180

89 An aircraft is flying 5000 AMSL outside a control airspace The commander must fly at all times under

a) Aerodrome control

~ FL5Chshy5000 as Altitude

d 5000 as Height

90 For the FACILITIES the pilot should refer to

a) AIC b NOTAM

AtPlt5 NOTAM CODES

91 A fresh flight pl~n is required when

a) a f1~ght is delayed for take off

controlled fiight is delayedfgty more than 30 minutes a controlled flight is delayed by more than 60 minutes

d an- un-controlled flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes

91 Photography at an aerodrome tan be permitted by

a) DGCAJDDGCA D(gt~ )~LI b) Director of regulation amp inspection (DRampI)

c) Controller of aerodromes rltI All

92 No member of the operation crew shall consume any alcoholic drink or narcotic drug with in a period of12 Hours before1Jight amp during ffighL

A3 Epileptic patients can be canied on board provided they are accompanied by an attendanL

94 While refueling an aircraft no naked flame is allowed within a distance oL 30 Vv--s

95 The largest polygon forming a danger zone around a refueling aircraft is _obtained by joining points ~mtrs away from the wing and the fueling vehicle

t lt J_ 1 _ MId)

shy

12

96 Except in an emergency dropping of articles from an aircraft isprohibited except basket of fine sand or waterbullbull

97 If the age of a cpt holder is more than 40 years the validity of medical is for bull 06 monttis bull bull (4Stfic4t

98 The~ of air worthiness can be suspended-or wi~drawnwhen

a) ac suffers major damage b acs~ffers major defect ~ c)pound unauthorized modifications carried out

V99 Pilots personal log book is to be preserved for 5 years from the last date of entry

A 00 ~e minimum height to be flown in hilly areas in IFR flight is bull2000 above the highest obstaclewithin a radius of 5 nm frQm the position of ac

--101 An aircraft flies away from base The daily inspection is valid for a period of 4 days or 12 hours of flying whichever is earlier

i02 50latkm percc for yellow fever is 06 days-----403 The thickness of transition layer is 1000J-1499 ~

104 middot The RVR is measured at a height of 16 FPTLmiddot

105 The an is applicable for

a scheduled flights only b) Scheduled flights amptraining flights

fl All flight -

~06 Over hilly areas IFR flights require a vertical clearance of

A 2000 feet with in 8 Km of the position oJ aircraft b) 2000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft c) 1000 feet with in 8 Km of the positiOn of aircraft d) 1000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft

107 Control of air traffic over an aerodrome below 3000 feet is by

a) approach control aerodrome control~

c) control area

108 Aerobatics should not be performed below

~ 2000 feet 5000 feet

c) 4000 feet

109 RfT signal for emergency is

a) security

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 7: Albatross - Regs QB

]- shy

c 63

55 A unit set up to provide air traffic control for aerodrome traffic is

c-aJ Aerodrome control service b) Aerodrome control tower c) Area control service

The most effective way to use eves at night is

a) Focus only at dim lights at a distance b) Flutter eyes rapidly

1 Scan slowly to center off vision Focus only on bright lights

57 when approaching to land on a flat darkened or flat snow covered surface the approach might appear to be

ar High - )~

b Steep

A Shallow d) Low

58 A portion of the airport reserved for loading off loading of cargo passengersparJciog of aircraft amp for small maintenance except for taxiing is called

A Apron b Movement area c) Maneuvering area d) Taxiway

59 The flight duty time limitations are raid down in

a) Aircraft manual b) Aircraft Rules 1937

AIC AehJgt~~ ~~~ ((~Lu~ d) As in a amp the maximum daty time for domestic operations is limited to 11

hours

vAiO Minimum rest period after domestic flight duty is

a) Twice the duty time performed b) Twice the flight time performed

As in b but not less than 8 hours71 61 The maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 30 days

ar~

a) 100

Ig 125 80

d) 120

reg The Maximum number of hours that can be flown by a pilot in consecutive 7 days are

a) 30

8

b) 50 c) 40 d) 25

63 At an aerodrome the aerobatics can becarried out above 6000 feet

A

a) Beyond 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome b) Beyond 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

Within 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome d) Within 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

64 Flying in Danger area is

a) Prohibited b) Permitted above a certain flight level

A Allowed if permitted by A TC ~

d) Allowed if permitted by DGCA

65 Flying in an aircraft below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled airspace the minimum horizontal separation from clouds is

~

a) 300 meters b) 500 meters

1500 meters 1500 feet

66 An aircraft wants to indicate tne difficulties which eompel to land without requiring assistance will do so by

a) firing red pyrotechnically lights b) firing red amp green pyrotechnically lights

firing white pyrotechnically lights or by repeated switching ON amp OFF-of ~ the LandinJ light of navigation ligh~

67 Aircraft is helding North amp sees green navigation lightof another aircraft at a relative bearing of045 the aircraft

~

a) are on a collision course rr are not on a collision course

c) Could be on a collision course

~68 Above f1~ght level 290 the vertical clearance between aircrafts on reciprocal tracks is

a) 1000 feet ff 2000 feet c) 4000 feet

Lateral separation using VOR is

15 degat distance of more than 15 nm~ b) 30 deg at distance of more than 15 nm c) 10 deg at distance of more than 15 nm

70 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft 6n RNJ can be removed

a) extricate dead animal amp persons

71

Z2

73

74

75

L77

78

79

9

~v extriclte animals amp persons dead or alive c) to pennit movement of other aircraft

An aircraft lands atan uncontrolled aerodrome can take off again

a) with the permission of OGCA A without any permission of PGCA

c) only if there is no injUy-loany onemiddot

Changes in the aeronautical services which are likely to last for more than 2 hr~ aremiddot given in NOTAMS

Series AA b) Series B c) SeriesG

On board a civil aircraft the Airl=orce Army Navy personnel can

a) not carry arms at all h carry arms with the pennission of DGCA

sarry anns with the permissjonolcentraJGovlA )lt

Aircraft incident must be reported with in

a) 24 hrs b) -36 hrs

-48 hrs(1shyAn aircraft accident is to be reported with in

24 hrs~ 36 hrs

c) 46 hrsmiddotmiddot

An aircraft in circuit encounters RIT failure how will the pilot acknowledge the light signals received by him

a) The pilot will pitch the nose up and down -1)) The pilot will rock wings

c) The pilot will switch onoff the landing lights

Petroleum in bulk means

a) Petroleum in receptacle of 900 Lit shy)i( Petroleum in ~ceptacJe ofmore than 900 Ut~ c) Petroleum in receptacle of less than 900 Lit

o

Red Pyrotechnical light given to an aircraft in flight by the Control tower means

a) Keep circling and give way to another aircraft b) You can land here at this aerodrome

$dr4 Not withstanding previous instruction do not land for the time being d) means nothing to an aircraft in air

Incubation period for Relapsing Fever

10

a) Eight days b) Six days - shyc) Four days

---

If there is a patientmiddot on board suffering from any Quarantinable decease the ri~ commander will send a health report to the health officer w

- ~~

a) b c

A)

48 Hrs prior to the arrival t~ ul~ ~ 4 Hrs prior to the arrival VLecL ~ b-e3 Hrs prior to the arrival -shy2 Hrs prior to the arrival is () t 4 f-~~

~81 A person who has died of Yellow Fever needs to be brought to India

if The body can hot be brought to India b) The body can only be brought provided it is hermetically sealed c) Provided the body is preserved in a wooden box d Provided the body is enclosed in a zinc box

~82_ Either hand along with the palm downwards and placed level with the chest and when moved laterally means

CuUhe engines(A b) Slowdown c) ChOCKS away d) Means nothing

-----83_ Operational Manual is

----a) Prepared by the manufacture and auth06zed by operator b) Prepared by DGCA and authorized by the operator c) Prepared by the operator and authorized-by manufaclurer

Prepared by the operator and authorized by the DGCAr-A -84 Any prisoner can be carried abroad or Qnboard any aircraft only if

a) The prisoner is accompanied by anmiddotarmed guard Permitted by the DGCA in writingP1

~ c) Permitted by the District Magistrate d Permitted by the Commissioner of police

-85 Leaflets containing printed matter can only be dropped from any aircrafti motion if

Permitted by the DIst Magistrate or The Commissioner of PolicemiddotA b) Permitted by the OGCA c) Permitted by the DDGCA d) Permitted by the ORampL

An aircraft is commencing descend from its initial FL 290 over Palam-Airport The altimeter reads 12000 ft The commander will report his ertical distance to the ATe in terms of

12000 Altitude_

~ FL 120 c) FL 290

It

d) 29000 Altitude

An aircraft is following 020 TrM The choice of FL available to the pilot are

1 507090150110190210230250270290370410450 55759515517519521523 5255275295

c) 507090110130160180200220240260280

)(88 An ai~craft is following 220Tr(M) as per the quadrental rule the pilot must Choose FL between

a) 119-269 b) 269-359

180-26Y 090-180

89 An aircraft is flying 5000 AMSL outside a control airspace The commander must fly at all times under

a) Aerodrome control

~ FL5Chshy5000 as Altitude

d 5000 as Height

90 For the FACILITIES the pilot should refer to

a) AIC b NOTAM

AtPlt5 NOTAM CODES

91 A fresh flight pl~n is required when

a) a f1~ght is delayed for take off

controlled fiight is delayedfgty more than 30 minutes a controlled flight is delayed by more than 60 minutes

d an- un-controlled flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes

91 Photography at an aerodrome tan be permitted by

a) DGCAJDDGCA D(gt~ )~LI b) Director of regulation amp inspection (DRampI)

c) Controller of aerodromes rltI All

92 No member of the operation crew shall consume any alcoholic drink or narcotic drug with in a period of12 Hours before1Jight amp during ffighL

A3 Epileptic patients can be canied on board provided they are accompanied by an attendanL

94 While refueling an aircraft no naked flame is allowed within a distance oL 30 Vv--s

95 The largest polygon forming a danger zone around a refueling aircraft is _obtained by joining points ~mtrs away from the wing and the fueling vehicle

t lt J_ 1 _ MId)

shy

12

96 Except in an emergency dropping of articles from an aircraft isprohibited except basket of fine sand or waterbullbull

97 If the age of a cpt holder is more than 40 years the validity of medical is for bull 06 monttis bull bull (4Stfic4t

98 The~ of air worthiness can be suspended-or wi~drawnwhen

a) ac suffers major damage b acs~ffers major defect ~ c)pound unauthorized modifications carried out

V99 Pilots personal log book is to be preserved for 5 years from the last date of entry

A 00 ~e minimum height to be flown in hilly areas in IFR flight is bull2000 above the highest obstaclewithin a radius of 5 nm frQm the position of ac

--101 An aircraft flies away from base The daily inspection is valid for a period of 4 days or 12 hours of flying whichever is earlier

i02 50latkm percc for yellow fever is 06 days-----403 The thickness of transition layer is 1000J-1499 ~

104 middot The RVR is measured at a height of 16 FPTLmiddot

105 The an is applicable for

a scheduled flights only b) Scheduled flights amptraining flights

fl All flight -

~06 Over hilly areas IFR flights require a vertical clearance of

A 2000 feet with in 8 Km of the position oJ aircraft b) 2000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft c) 1000 feet with in 8 Km of the positiOn of aircraft d) 1000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft

107 Control of air traffic over an aerodrome below 3000 feet is by

a) approach control aerodrome control~

c) control area

108 Aerobatics should not be performed below

~ 2000 feet 5000 feet

c) 4000 feet

109 RfT signal for emergency is

a) security

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 8: Albatross - Regs QB

8

b) 50 c) 40 d) 25

63 At an aerodrome the aerobatics can becarried out above 6000 feet

A

a) Beyond 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome b) Beyond 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

Within 2 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome d) Within 4 nm of nearest perimeter of aerodrome

64 Flying in Danger area is

a) Prohibited b) Permitted above a certain flight level

A Allowed if permitted by A TC ~

d) Allowed if permitted by DGCA

65 Flying in an aircraft below 3000 feet AMSL in a controlled airspace the minimum horizontal separation from clouds is

~

a) 300 meters b) 500 meters

1500 meters 1500 feet

66 An aircraft wants to indicate tne difficulties which eompel to land without requiring assistance will do so by

a) firing red pyrotechnically lights b) firing red amp green pyrotechnically lights

firing white pyrotechnically lights or by repeated switching ON amp OFF-of ~ the LandinJ light of navigation ligh~

67 Aircraft is helding North amp sees green navigation lightof another aircraft at a relative bearing of045 the aircraft

~

a) are on a collision course rr are not on a collision course

c) Could be on a collision course

~68 Above f1~ght level 290 the vertical clearance between aircrafts on reciprocal tracks is

a) 1000 feet ff 2000 feet c) 4000 feet

Lateral separation using VOR is

15 degat distance of more than 15 nm~ b) 30 deg at distance of more than 15 nm c) 10 deg at distance of more than 15 nm

70 The wreckage of a crashed aircraft 6n RNJ can be removed

a) extricate dead animal amp persons

71

Z2

73

74

75

L77

78

79

9

~v extriclte animals amp persons dead or alive c) to pennit movement of other aircraft

An aircraft lands atan uncontrolled aerodrome can take off again

a) with the permission of OGCA A without any permission of PGCA

c) only if there is no injUy-loany onemiddot

Changes in the aeronautical services which are likely to last for more than 2 hr~ aremiddot given in NOTAMS

Series AA b) Series B c) SeriesG

On board a civil aircraft the Airl=orce Army Navy personnel can

a) not carry arms at all h carry arms with the pennission of DGCA

sarry anns with the permissjonolcentraJGovlA )lt

Aircraft incident must be reported with in

a) 24 hrs b) -36 hrs

-48 hrs(1shyAn aircraft accident is to be reported with in

24 hrs~ 36 hrs

c) 46 hrsmiddotmiddot

An aircraft in circuit encounters RIT failure how will the pilot acknowledge the light signals received by him

a) The pilot will pitch the nose up and down -1)) The pilot will rock wings

c) The pilot will switch onoff the landing lights

Petroleum in bulk means

a) Petroleum in receptacle of 900 Lit shy)i( Petroleum in ~ceptacJe ofmore than 900 Ut~ c) Petroleum in receptacle of less than 900 Lit

o

Red Pyrotechnical light given to an aircraft in flight by the Control tower means

a) Keep circling and give way to another aircraft b) You can land here at this aerodrome

$dr4 Not withstanding previous instruction do not land for the time being d) means nothing to an aircraft in air

Incubation period for Relapsing Fever

10

a) Eight days b) Six days - shyc) Four days

---

If there is a patientmiddot on board suffering from any Quarantinable decease the ri~ commander will send a health report to the health officer w

- ~~

a) b c

A)

48 Hrs prior to the arrival t~ ul~ ~ 4 Hrs prior to the arrival VLecL ~ b-e3 Hrs prior to the arrival -shy2 Hrs prior to the arrival is () t 4 f-~~

~81 A person who has died of Yellow Fever needs to be brought to India

if The body can hot be brought to India b) The body can only be brought provided it is hermetically sealed c) Provided the body is preserved in a wooden box d Provided the body is enclosed in a zinc box

~82_ Either hand along with the palm downwards and placed level with the chest and when moved laterally means

CuUhe engines(A b) Slowdown c) ChOCKS away d) Means nothing

-----83_ Operational Manual is

----a) Prepared by the manufacture and auth06zed by operator b) Prepared by DGCA and authorized by the operator c) Prepared by the operator and authorized-by manufaclurer

Prepared by the operator and authorized by the DGCAr-A -84 Any prisoner can be carried abroad or Qnboard any aircraft only if

a) The prisoner is accompanied by anmiddotarmed guard Permitted by the DGCA in writingP1

~ c) Permitted by the District Magistrate d Permitted by the Commissioner of police

-85 Leaflets containing printed matter can only be dropped from any aircrafti motion if

Permitted by the DIst Magistrate or The Commissioner of PolicemiddotA b) Permitted by the OGCA c) Permitted by the DDGCA d) Permitted by the ORampL

An aircraft is commencing descend from its initial FL 290 over Palam-Airport The altimeter reads 12000 ft The commander will report his ertical distance to the ATe in terms of

12000 Altitude_

~ FL 120 c) FL 290

It

d) 29000 Altitude

An aircraft is following 020 TrM The choice of FL available to the pilot are

1 507090150110190210230250270290370410450 55759515517519521523 5255275295

c) 507090110130160180200220240260280

)(88 An ai~craft is following 220Tr(M) as per the quadrental rule the pilot must Choose FL between

a) 119-269 b) 269-359

180-26Y 090-180

89 An aircraft is flying 5000 AMSL outside a control airspace The commander must fly at all times under

a) Aerodrome control

~ FL5Chshy5000 as Altitude

d 5000 as Height

90 For the FACILITIES the pilot should refer to

a) AIC b NOTAM

AtPlt5 NOTAM CODES

91 A fresh flight pl~n is required when

a) a f1~ght is delayed for take off

controlled fiight is delayedfgty more than 30 minutes a controlled flight is delayed by more than 60 minutes

d an- un-controlled flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes

91 Photography at an aerodrome tan be permitted by

a) DGCAJDDGCA D(gt~ )~LI b) Director of regulation amp inspection (DRampI)

c) Controller of aerodromes rltI All

92 No member of the operation crew shall consume any alcoholic drink or narcotic drug with in a period of12 Hours before1Jight amp during ffighL

A3 Epileptic patients can be canied on board provided they are accompanied by an attendanL

94 While refueling an aircraft no naked flame is allowed within a distance oL 30 Vv--s

95 The largest polygon forming a danger zone around a refueling aircraft is _obtained by joining points ~mtrs away from the wing and the fueling vehicle

t lt J_ 1 _ MId)

shy

12

96 Except in an emergency dropping of articles from an aircraft isprohibited except basket of fine sand or waterbullbull

97 If the age of a cpt holder is more than 40 years the validity of medical is for bull 06 monttis bull bull (4Stfic4t

98 The~ of air worthiness can be suspended-or wi~drawnwhen

a) ac suffers major damage b acs~ffers major defect ~ c)pound unauthorized modifications carried out

V99 Pilots personal log book is to be preserved for 5 years from the last date of entry

A 00 ~e minimum height to be flown in hilly areas in IFR flight is bull2000 above the highest obstaclewithin a radius of 5 nm frQm the position of ac

--101 An aircraft flies away from base The daily inspection is valid for a period of 4 days or 12 hours of flying whichever is earlier

i02 50latkm percc for yellow fever is 06 days-----403 The thickness of transition layer is 1000J-1499 ~

104 middot The RVR is measured at a height of 16 FPTLmiddot

105 The an is applicable for

a scheduled flights only b) Scheduled flights amptraining flights

fl All flight -

~06 Over hilly areas IFR flights require a vertical clearance of

A 2000 feet with in 8 Km of the position oJ aircraft b) 2000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft c) 1000 feet with in 8 Km of the positiOn of aircraft d) 1000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft

107 Control of air traffic over an aerodrome below 3000 feet is by

a) approach control aerodrome control~

c) control area

108 Aerobatics should not be performed below

~ 2000 feet 5000 feet

c) 4000 feet

109 RfT signal for emergency is

a) security

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 9: Albatross - Regs QB

71

Z2

73

74

75

L77

78

79

9

~v extriclte animals amp persons dead or alive c) to pennit movement of other aircraft

An aircraft lands atan uncontrolled aerodrome can take off again

a) with the permission of OGCA A without any permission of PGCA

c) only if there is no injUy-loany onemiddot

Changes in the aeronautical services which are likely to last for more than 2 hr~ aremiddot given in NOTAMS

Series AA b) Series B c) SeriesG

On board a civil aircraft the Airl=orce Army Navy personnel can

a) not carry arms at all h carry arms with the pennission of DGCA

sarry anns with the permissjonolcentraJGovlA )lt

Aircraft incident must be reported with in

a) 24 hrs b) -36 hrs

-48 hrs(1shyAn aircraft accident is to be reported with in

24 hrs~ 36 hrs

c) 46 hrsmiddotmiddot

An aircraft in circuit encounters RIT failure how will the pilot acknowledge the light signals received by him

a) The pilot will pitch the nose up and down -1)) The pilot will rock wings

c) The pilot will switch onoff the landing lights

Petroleum in bulk means

a) Petroleum in receptacle of 900 Lit shy)i( Petroleum in ~ceptacJe ofmore than 900 Ut~ c) Petroleum in receptacle of less than 900 Lit

o

Red Pyrotechnical light given to an aircraft in flight by the Control tower means

a) Keep circling and give way to another aircraft b) You can land here at this aerodrome

$dr4 Not withstanding previous instruction do not land for the time being d) means nothing to an aircraft in air

Incubation period for Relapsing Fever

10

a) Eight days b) Six days - shyc) Four days

---

If there is a patientmiddot on board suffering from any Quarantinable decease the ri~ commander will send a health report to the health officer w

- ~~

a) b c

A)

48 Hrs prior to the arrival t~ ul~ ~ 4 Hrs prior to the arrival VLecL ~ b-e3 Hrs prior to the arrival -shy2 Hrs prior to the arrival is () t 4 f-~~

~81 A person who has died of Yellow Fever needs to be brought to India

if The body can hot be brought to India b) The body can only be brought provided it is hermetically sealed c) Provided the body is preserved in a wooden box d Provided the body is enclosed in a zinc box

~82_ Either hand along with the palm downwards and placed level with the chest and when moved laterally means

CuUhe engines(A b) Slowdown c) ChOCKS away d) Means nothing

-----83_ Operational Manual is

----a) Prepared by the manufacture and auth06zed by operator b) Prepared by DGCA and authorized by the operator c) Prepared by the operator and authorized-by manufaclurer

Prepared by the operator and authorized by the DGCAr-A -84 Any prisoner can be carried abroad or Qnboard any aircraft only if

a) The prisoner is accompanied by anmiddotarmed guard Permitted by the DGCA in writingP1

~ c) Permitted by the District Magistrate d Permitted by the Commissioner of police

-85 Leaflets containing printed matter can only be dropped from any aircrafti motion if

Permitted by the DIst Magistrate or The Commissioner of PolicemiddotA b) Permitted by the OGCA c) Permitted by the DDGCA d) Permitted by the ORampL

An aircraft is commencing descend from its initial FL 290 over Palam-Airport The altimeter reads 12000 ft The commander will report his ertical distance to the ATe in terms of

12000 Altitude_

~ FL 120 c) FL 290

It

d) 29000 Altitude

An aircraft is following 020 TrM The choice of FL available to the pilot are

1 507090150110190210230250270290370410450 55759515517519521523 5255275295

c) 507090110130160180200220240260280

)(88 An ai~craft is following 220Tr(M) as per the quadrental rule the pilot must Choose FL between

a) 119-269 b) 269-359

180-26Y 090-180

89 An aircraft is flying 5000 AMSL outside a control airspace The commander must fly at all times under

a) Aerodrome control

~ FL5Chshy5000 as Altitude

d 5000 as Height

90 For the FACILITIES the pilot should refer to

a) AIC b NOTAM

AtPlt5 NOTAM CODES

91 A fresh flight pl~n is required when

a) a f1~ght is delayed for take off

controlled fiight is delayedfgty more than 30 minutes a controlled flight is delayed by more than 60 minutes

d an- un-controlled flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes

91 Photography at an aerodrome tan be permitted by

a) DGCAJDDGCA D(gt~ )~LI b) Director of regulation amp inspection (DRampI)

c) Controller of aerodromes rltI All

92 No member of the operation crew shall consume any alcoholic drink or narcotic drug with in a period of12 Hours before1Jight amp during ffighL

A3 Epileptic patients can be canied on board provided they are accompanied by an attendanL

94 While refueling an aircraft no naked flame is allowed within a distance oL 30 Vv--s

95 The largest polygon forming a danger zone around a refueling aircraft is _obtained by joining points ~mtrs away from the wing and the fueling vehicle

t lt J_ 1 _ MId)

shy

12

96 Except in an emergency dropping of articles from an aircraft isprohibited except basket of fine sand or waterbullbull

97 If the age of a cpt holder is more than 40 years the validity of medical is for bull 06 monttis bull bull (4Stfic4t

98 The~ of air worthiness can be suspended-or wi~drawnwhen

a) ac suffers major damage b acs~ffers major defect ~ c)pound unauthorized modifications carried out

V99 Pilots personal log book is to be preserved for 5 years from the last date of entry

A 00 ~e minimum height to be flown in hilly areas in IFR flight is bull2000 above the highest obstaclewithin a radius of 5 nm frQm the position of ac

--101 An aircraft flies away from base The daily inspection is valid for a period of 4 days or 12 hours of flying whichever is earlier

i02 50latkm percc for yellow fever is 06 days-----403 The thickness of transition layer is 1000J-1499 ~

104 middot The RVR is measured at a height of 16 FPTLmiddot

105 The an is applicable for

a scheduled flights only b) Scheduled flights amptraining flights

fl All flight -

~06 Over hilly areas IFR flights require a vertical clearance of

A 2000 feet with in 8 Km of the position oJ aircraft b) 2000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft c) 1000 feet with in 8 Km of the positiOn of aircraft d) 1000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft

107 Control of air traffic over an aerodrome below 3000 feet is by

a) approach control aerodrome control~

c) control area

108 Aerobatics should not be performed below

~ 2000 feet 5000 feet

c) 4000 feet

109 RfT signal for emergency is

a) security

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 10: Albatross - Regs QB

10

a) Eight days b) Six days - shyc) Four days

---

If there is a patientmiddot on board suffering from any Quarantinable decease the ri~ commander will send a health report to the health officer w

- ~~

a) b c

A)

48 Hrs prior to the arrival t~ ul~ ~ 4 Hrs prior to the arrival VLecL ~ b-e3 Hrs prior to the arrival -shy2 Hrs prior to the arrival is () t 4 f-~~

~81 A person who has died of Yellow Fever needs to be brought to India

if The body can hot be brought to India b) The body can only be brought provided it is hermetically sealed c) Provided the body is preserved in a wooden box d Provided the body is enclosed in a zinc box

~82_ Either hand along with the palm downwards and placed level with the chest and when moved laterally means

CuUhe engines(A b) Slowdown c) ChOCKS away d) Means nothing

-----83_ Operational Manual is

----a) Prepared by the manufacture and auth06zed by operator b) Prepared by DGCA and authorized by the operator c) Prepared by the operator and authorized-by manufaclurer

Prepared by the operator and authorized by the DGCAr-A -84 Any prisoner can be carried abroad or Qnboard any aircraft only if

a) The prisoner is accompanied by anmiddotarmed guard Permitted by the DGCA in writingP1

~ c) Permitted by the District Magistrate d Permitted by the Commissioner of police

-85 Leaflets containing printed matter can only be dropped from any aircrafti motion if

Permitted by the DIst Magistrate or The Commissioner of PolicemiddotA b) Permitted by the OGCA c) Permitted by the DDGCA d) Permitted by the ORampL

An aircraft is commencing descend from its initial FL 290 over Palam-Airport The altimeter reads 12000 ft The commander will report his ertical distance to the ATe in terms of

12000 Altitude_

~ FL 120 c) FL 290

It

d) 29000 Altitude

An aircraft is following 020 TrM The choice of FL available to the pilot are

1 507090150110190210230250270290370410450 55759515517519521523 5255275295

c) 507090110130160180200220240260280

)(88 An ai~craft is following 220Tr(M) as per the quadrental rule the pilot must Choose FL between

a) 119-269 b) 269-359

180-26Y 090-180

89 An aircraft is flying 5000 AMSL outside a control airspace The commander must fly at all times under

a) Aerodrome control

~ FL5Chshy5000 as Altitude

d 5000 as Height

90 For the FACILITIES the pilot should refer to

a) AIC b NOTAM

AtPlt5 NOTAM CODES

91 A fresh flight pl~n is required when

a) a f1~ght is delayed for take off

controlled fiight is delayedfgty more than 30 minutes a controlled flight is delayed by more than 60 minutes

d an- un-controlled flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes

91 Photography at an aerodrome tan be permitted by

a) DGCAJDDGCA D(gt~ )~LI b) Director of regulation amp inspection (DRampI)

c) Controller of aerodromes rltI All

92 No member of the operation crew shall consume any alcoholic drink or narcotic drug with in a period of12 Hours before1Jight amp during ffighL

A3 Epileptic patients can be canied on board provided they are accompanied by an attendanL

94 While refueling an aircraft no naked flame is allowed within a distance oL 30 Vv--s

95 The largest polygon forming a danger zone around a refueling aircraft is _obtained by joining points ~mtrs away from the wing and the fueling vehicle

t lt J_ 1 _ MId)

shy

12

96 Except in an emergency dropping of articles from an aircraft isprohibited except basket of fine sand or waterbullbull

97 If the age of a cpt holder is more than 40 years the validity of medical is for bull 06 monttis bull bull (4Stfic4t

98 The~ of air worthiness can be suspended-or wi~drawnwhen

a) ac suffers major damage b acs~ffers major defect ~ c)pound unauthorized modifications carried out

V99 Pilots personal log book is to be preserved for 5 years from the last date of entry

A 00 ~e minimum height to be flown in hilly areas in IFR flight is bull2000 above the highest obstaclewithin a radius of 5 nm frQm the position of ac

--101 An aircraft flies away from base The daily inspection is valid for a period of 4 days or 12 hours of flying whichever is earlier

i02 50latkm percc for yellow fever is 06 days-----403 The thickness of transition layer is 1000J-1499 ~

104 middot The RVR is measured at a height of 16 FPTLmiddot

105 The an is applicable for

a scheduled flights only b) Scheduled flights amptraining flights

fl All flight -

~06 Over hilly areas IFR flights require a vertical clearance of

A 2000 feet with in 8 Km of the position oJ aircraft b) 2000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft c) 1000 feet with in 8 Km of the positiOn of aircraft d) 1000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft

107 Control of air traffic over an aerodrome below 3000 feet is by

a) approach control aerodrome control~

c) control area

108 Aerobatics should not be performed below

~ 2000 feet 5000 feet

c) 4000 feet

109 RfT signal for emergency is

a) security

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 11: Albatross - Regs QB

It

d) 29000 Altitude

An aircraft is following 020 TrM The choice of FL available to the pilot are

1 507090150110190210230250270290370410450 55759515517519521523 5255275295

c) 507090110130160180200220240260280

)(88 An ai~craft is following 220Tr(M) as per the quadrental rule the pilot must Choose FL between

a) 119-269 b) 269-359

180-26Y 090-180

89 An aircraft is flying 5000 AMSL outside a control airspace The commander must fly at all times under

a) Aerodrome control

~ FL5Chshy5000 as Altitude

d 5000 as Height

90 For the FACILITIES the pilot should refer to

a) AIC b NOTAM

AtPlt5 NOTAM CODES

91 A fresh flight pl~n is required when

a) a f1~ght is delayed for take off

controlled fiight is delayedfgty more than 30 minutes a controlled flight is delayed by more than 60 minutes

d an- un-controlled flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes

91 Photography at an aerodrome tan be permitted by

a) DGCAJDDGCA D(gt~ )~LI b) Director of regulation amp inspection (DRampI)

c) Controller of aerodromes rltI All

92 No member of the operation crew shall consume any alcoholic drink or narcotic drug with in a period of12 Hours before1Jight amp during ffighL

A3 Epileptic patients can be canied on board provided they are accompanied by an attendanL

94 While refueling an aircraft no naked flame is allowed within a distance oL 30 Vv--s

95 The largest polygon forming a danger zone around a refueling aircraft is _obtained by joining points ~mtrs away from the wing and the fueling vehicle

t lt J_ 1 _ MId)

shy

12

96 Except in an emergency dropping of articles from an aircraft isprohibited except basket of fine sand or waterbullbull

97 If the age of a cpt holder is more than 40 years the validity of medical is for bull 06 monttis bull bull (4Stfic4t

98 The~ of air worthiness can be suspended-or wi~drawnwhen

a) ac suffers major damage b acs~ffers major defect ~ c)pound unauthorized modifications carried out

V99 Pilots personal log book is to be preserved for 5 years from the last date of entry

A 00 ~e minimum height to be flown in hilly areas in IFR flight is bull2000 above the highest obstaclewithin a radius of 5 nm frQm the position of ac

--101 An aircraft flies away from base The daily inspection is valid for a period of 4 days or 12 hours of flying whichever is earlier

i02 50latkm percc for yellow fever is 06 days-----403 The thickness of transition layer is 1000J-1499 ~

104 middot The RVR is measured at a height of 16 FPTLmiddot

105 The an is applicable for

a scheduled flights only b) Scheduled flights amptraining flights

fl All flight -

~06 Over hilly areas IFR flights require a vertical clearance of

A 2000 feet with in 8 Km of the position oJ aircraft b) 2000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft c) 1000 feet with in 8 Km of the positiOn of aircraft d) 1000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft

107 Control of air traffic over an aerodrome below 3000 feet is by

a) approach control aerodrome control~

c) control area

108 Aerobatics should not be performed below

~ 2000 feet 5000 feet

c) 4000 feet

109 RfT signal for emergency is

a) security

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 12: Albatross - Regs QB

shy

12

96 Except in an emergency dropping of articles from an aircraft isprohibited except basket of fine sand or waterbullbull

97 If the age of a cpt holder is more than 40 years the validity of medical is for bull 06 monttis bull bull (4Stfic4t

98 The~ of air worthiness can be suspended-or wi~drawnwhen

a) ac suffers major damage b acs~ffers major defect ~ c)pound unauthorized modifications carried out

V99 Pilots personal log book is to be preserved for 5 years from the last date of entry

A 00 ~e minimum height to be flown in hilly areas in IFR flight is bull2000 above the highest obstaclewithin a radius of 5 nm frQm the position of ac

--101 An aircraft flies away from base The daily inspection is valid for a period of 4 days or 12 hours of flying whichever is earlier

i02 50latkm percc for yellow fever is 06 days-----403 The thickness of transition layer is 1000J-1499 ~

104 middot The RVR is measured at a height of 16 FPTLmiddot

105 The an is applicable for

a scheduled flights only b) Scheduled flights amptraining flights

fl All flight -

~06 Over hilly areas IFR flights require a vertical clearance of

A 2000 feet with in 8 Km of the position oJ aircraft b) 2000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft c) 1000 feet with in 8 Km of the positiOn of aircraft d) 1000 feet with in 5 Km of the position of aircraft

107 Control of air traffic over an aerodrome below 3000 feet is by

a) approach control aerodrome control~

c) control area

108 Aerobatics should not be performed below

~ 2000 feet 5000 feet

c) 4000 feet

109 RfT signal for emergency is

a) security

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 13: Albatross - Regs QB

13

b) Pesn Pan

MaydayYY 110 Medical for a CPL holder is valid fot

~

a) 2 years-shya) 1middot year

1 year if age is less than 40 years 2 years if theage is less than 40 years

111 Over Bombay aerodrome

a) an aircraft can not fly VFR ~ an aircraft can fly VFR c) an aircraft can not fly IFR

112 Control zone refers to

a) A corridor within a controlled aifSPace -wAefemiddotR-adioNavigafioo facilities arE available

b) A controlled airspace extenqing upwards from a specified height above the surface of the earth A controlled airspace extending upw~rds from the surface of the earth

113 Routes designated by the alphabet W relate to

a) World wide routes )f Domestic routes

c) Local routes d) International routes

114 Rules regarding demolition of obstructions cause~ by tall buildings ~nd trees are laid 1n

Aircraft rules 1937 ~ Aircraft public health rules 1954 c) Aircraft rules 1994 d) Aircraft act 1994

115 Before the first flight of the day it is whose responsibility to check the serviceability of the RT apparatus

4 The commander b) The Co-Pilot c) The radio officer

116 Rules related to carriage of dead bodies in an aircraft are laid down in

~ Aircraft rules 1954 b) Air corporation aCt 1953 c) Aircraft authority act 1971 d) Carriage by air act of 1972

117 Air hostesses are to be carried when the seating capacity is

a) 20 seat

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 14: Albatross - Regs QB

More than 10~ c) More than 15 d) Carriage of air hostesses depends upon- number of Passengers not uPon

numberof seats ~

118 The age of Co-Pilot flying to be counted towards the renewal of CPl as PIC is

a) 80 b 30 K 50 d) 100

119 A fresh AOC is required if

~ A flight is delayed for gtthan 30Min at any intermediate airport b) A flight is delayed forgt than 1 Hr at any intermediate airport c) Not required if the flight is delayed but conducted on the same day

120 The IFR flight vertical separation minrma over hilly terrain is

2000 above-the highest obstacle within a radius of 5 Km from the aircraft 2000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 8 Km from the aircraft

c 1000 above the highest obstacle within a radius of 5Nm from the aircraft c) 1000 above the highe$t obstacle within a radius of BNm from the aircraft

121 While refueling any unauthorized perSon should not be near the re-fueling site within

a) 30 meters b 15 feet c 30 feet

4r 15 meters

122 AnticoUision lights must be installed if the AUW ofac is

lt a) less than 5700 Kg

more than 5700 Kg fh I0 0 0 0 l6-s more than 21000 Kg

~23 An aircraft can cross an A TS route with precautions such as

cross the ATS route at 90 degrees amp as in b below Ie ~v-- ~ UHf~ obtain permission minimum 10 minutes before crossing c) look but visually for any other traffic ~ ~-- ~ Hf d) all are correct

124 In a CTA the VFR ceiling is

~ a) 2500 feet

1~OO feet 3000 feet

d) 1000 feet

125 When in an emergency

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 15: Albatross - Regs QB

15

a) squawk code 7600 on mode A f 5D 0 b) squawk code 7600 on mode 8 ~ squawk code 7600 on mode C LbO 0

(0) None (or 7700) 7 ~~6o

Special VFR flight cannot be allowed if visigtility is less than

a) 5Km b) 5NM

4 15Km 2 Krn

127 The highest point on the landing area is called

a aerodrome efevation bull b Apron elevation

c) Center circle of the runway

128 Anti collision light is a light

a Green in colour affixed on to the runway b) A red fight on the port wing of the aircraft

A red Light visible 30 deg above and below the horizon of the aircraft ~ Which is visible in all directions

d) The navigation lights of any aircr3ft are also called anti- collision lights

1129 The pilot of aircraft A sees a Red navigation of the aircraft B at a Relalive Brg of 270

~ There is no risk of collision and both the altraft-shouldContinue Aircraft 8 should alter its course towards left

c) The pilot of aircraft A should alter its cOurse towards right to avoid collision

----130 An aircraft croSsing your course Hfrom your left on right angle You will be able tosee Us

a) Red light b) White light

A ~reen light

131 A NOTAM which relates to some repair lasting for more than 2 Hrs would come under

A Series ~ B Series c) C Series d) DSenes

132 A horizontal red square panel with one yellow diagonal means

a) All VFR are suspended and IFR have been declared compulsory b) Landings Prohibited c) Aircraft are to land Take off amp Taxi on runways and taxi ways only

Special precaution while tanding should be taken because of the bad ~ state of the Maneuvering area

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 16: Albatross - Regs QB

16

133 The visibilitY minima for those Airfines who have not filed their own Minimum with the OGCA for an airport for Non Precession approach is

a) 1500 b) 1500 meters c) 5Nm

37 Km~

134~ VFRflights outside a controlled airspace at a height abOve 5000 should not be carried out if the visibility falls below

8Km ~ b) 8Nm c) 5Km d) 3Km

135 The lateral separation using DR Navigation

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or ess 45 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more ~ 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or more

d) 30 deg between aircraft of 15 nm or less

136 In class A airspace

a) all flights are permitted b) only VFR flights are permitted

only IFR flights are pennitt~d~ 137 In class C airspacemiddot

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp are subjected to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separ~ted from other lFRflights amp from the VFR flights amp

receive information in respect of VFR flights c) VFR flights are separated from IFR flights amp receive information about other

VFR flights all are correc~

i( 138 In class 0 air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted amp all flights are subject to Air Traffic Control b) IFR flights are separated from other lFR flights amp receive information in

respect ofVFR flights c) VFR flights receive traffic information about other flights ~ all are correct

139 In class E airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive traffic information c) IFR flights are subject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from other IFR

n~h~ all are correct

140 In a class F air space

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 17: Albatross - Regs QB

17

a) lFR amp VFR flights are permitted bull b)

IFR flights receive air traffic advisory service

c all flights receive flght information service on request all are correct

141 The minimum number ofStewardsair hostesses to be carried yon board if the passenger canying capacity is 63

a 1 2~

c) 3

142 Pilots logbook is to be preserved for

a) 5 years from the date of starting the 109 book

A 5 years from the date of last entry c) till the pilot retires

143 Two white crosses on a signal square indicate

a) area not fit for the use of aircraft A gliding in progress

~

-J take permission before landing

144 Information nas been received that an aircraft is about make a forced landing It is

a alert phase b) uncertainty phase

distress phase~

145 Talking abouttheATS routes in India W means

~a) domestic routes b) international routes c) any of the above

146 Position report is requiredmiddotto be given when

~

a crossing an FIR b over a compulsory reporting point

if so required by ATC all are correct

147 Check rides are not counted when

a) aircraft is phased out of service when on a test flight~ for flying club training aircraft

d all are counted

148 Aerodrome data and facilities are given in

Aeradio

~ AlP c) Notams

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 18: Albatross - Regs QB

18

149 As regards Air services transit agreement India a signatory

True~ b) False

150 In the above question the privileges are

c) Permission to fly across its terdtory without landing

d) Permission to land for non traffic purpose

151 The aircraft registratiOn and marking procedures are given in ICAO Annexure

a) 7 1 ltb)

c) 11 d) 18

152 The navigation lights on an aircraft-are

a) right green lt110 degleft red 110 deg b) right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 70 deg

right green 110 deg left red 110 deg amp rear light white 140 deg~ 153 NOTAM class 1 in series A are issued when

a) information is of permanent nature information is valid for more than 2 hoursrbJ

lt c) information is valid for less than 2 hours - lt

154 An aircraft accident is to be reported

a) immediately within 24 hours~

c) within 48 hours d) as earty as possible

155 Wake turbulence separation minima for landinJh if an aircraft is to land behind a heavl aircraft - lt lt shy

~clt 2 minutes) 3 minutes

d) 5 minutes 156 The revised ETA is to be passed to the ATC if the actual TAS differs from thelt

planned T AS by shy

5 or 10 Knots ~ 10

c) 20

157 Prisoners can be carried on board aircraft with written permission of

a) DGCA b) Commissioner of Prisons c) Controller of police

~) OGCA DDGCA DRampI

l_

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 19: Albatross - Regs QB

19

158 In India all flights above which flight level are to be cleared IFR irrespective of weather conditions

i a 280

150 140

159 The supersonic speed (mach no ) is gt 12 Mach _

Hin Chal)~les in the frcquenciesllCCalion of Nav Aids arc notified by

a) Notams b) AIRAC System

AlP amendments ~ Aeradio amendments

161 Displaced threshold is due to WIP at some part of beginning of RfW cant be used for landing a~d a fresh threshold is marked further ahead

162 On t~esame aircraft you are making another flight on the same day

~ a fresh ADC clearance is required b) a fresh ADC clearance is not required

c) no ADC clearance is required

163 VVhaJ doe~ the following-marshalling signal indicate

a) eith~r arm amp hand level with should~r hand across tnroat amp palm downwards Cut motors

b) arms repeatedly crosses above head Stop c) arms-down palms facing outward swing arms outward remove chocks d) arms palms facing inward swing arms inwards insert chocks ~ e arms down palm towards inward swing arms inwards slow down f) arm down palm towards ground amp moved up amp down se~a times all dear

164 The lateral separation between aircraft VOR is

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less ~ 15 deg at a distance of 15nm or more

c) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more d) 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

165 The lateral separation between aircraft using NOB is

~

a) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or tess b) 15 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more

30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or more 30 deg at a distance of 15 nm or less

166 In a class airspace

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b) all flights receive flight information setvice on request

both are correct

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 20: Albatross - Regs QB

~

~

shy

20

167 In class B air space

a) IFR amp VFR flights are permitted b all flights are middotsubject to Air Traffic Control amp are separated from each other

both are correct~ 168 Non scheduled flights cal be made in India with a notice of

a) 24 hrs b) 36 hrs

y 72hrs

169 A person coming from Cholera infested area can enter India

a) Without any medical certificate 01 vaccination ~ With a certificate of vaccination

c) If accompanied With an attendant

170 Dead body of a person can be carried in an aircraft

~ a) If sealed in a wooden box

f hermeticlty sealed in a zinc box Can not oe carried at all

171 Seriously sick patients can be carried on boar-d the aircraft

~ jfaccompani~with an attefldant if certified tit by a medical officer

c) Cannot be carried at all

172 Tokyo Convention Act 1975 is applicable to a) All aircraft registered in India b) All aircraft registered in India amp Military aircraft amp State aircraft

All aircraft whether registered in India or except Military aircraft amp State~ aircraft d) AU aircraft whether registered in fndia or not

173 Wake turbulence separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircraft is to land behind a heavy aircraft

a) 2mts ~ 3mts

c 5 mts

174 A pilot can fly an aircraft which is not entered in his license for endorsement in the aircraft rating of his license

a) with in Indian teoitory with in 5 om of an aerodrome-within lFA of aerodrome~

c anywhere

175 If there is a temporary change in the aeronautical services it is intimated through

a) Amendment to AlP b) Ale

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 21: Albatross - Regs QB

21

l NOTAM

176 If navigation lights fail a night then an aircraft should

a) force land immediately b) uselanding lights amp continue to the destination

report to the nearest aerodrome amp land ~ 177 If an air~raft force lands at an uncontrolled aerodrome it Can takeoff again

~ after permission from OGCA after permission from the central Govt

c) if it is in a position to reach the destination

178 In India the ATS routSltrre-classif1ech3s

a) Class 0 airspaee Class F airspace~ c Class C airspace

179 At an aerodrome tower

a) Red amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome b) Red ampwhite beacon light indicates that it is a civiiaerOOfme

White amp green beacon light indicates that it is a civil aerodrome~ 180 The highest flightlevef that can be flown in India is

460

~ 450 c) 400

181 yFR flights at an aerodrome are nol permitted if visibilityis beloiN

~ 5km Skm

c) 3km

182 A series of green amp red pyrotechnic~ fired al short intervals towards an aircraft indicate that

a) The aircraft is entering a prohibited area b The aircraft is entering a danger area c) The aircraft is entering a restricted area

All are correct~ 183 The certifiCate of airworthiness is suspended if

~ a) Low flying is done

Un authorized modifications are done Un authorized flying is done

184 Landing amp housing charges are based on

All up weight of the aircraft Passengers carrying capacity of aircraft

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 22: Albatross - Regs QB

22

c) Actual~nding weight of the aircraft

185 The aircraft public health rules wore published in

~ a 1937 1954 ~ 1934

d) 1947

186 If an aircraft comes from a place which is a yellow fever area amp was disinfected it is to be quarantined

a) If it stopped at a place where there was yellow fever If there is a patient suffering from yellow fever on board

-_ ~ Not to be quarantined

187 The incubation period for yellow fever is

a) 8 days b) 6 days c) 4 days

188 Emergency check lists are prepared by the

3 Manufacturer amp authorized by operator Operator amp authorized by DGCA~

c DGCA amp authorized by manufacturer

189 Wake turbulente separation minima for landing if a light or a medium aircr~m islo land behind a heavy aircraft is

a) 2 mts 3mts

~ 5 mts

190 The highest point on the ground in an airfield is

a ARP b) Airfield elevation c) Aerodrome height

ObstUction height~ 191 Over Malabar hills in Mumbai aircraft can not fly within

~ a 2 nm from the Tower of silencG

1 om from the Tower of silence 5 Km from the Tower of silence

192 Supersonic aircraft can fly over Indian territory

a) Above Mach 20 b) Unrestricted lt) Below Mach 1

c-

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 23: Albatross - Regs QB

193 When-crossing FIR the SSR should be selected to vhic1 channel

a 20000

b) 7600 c) 7700 d) 7500

194 The validity period of a CPL is

a 5 Years b) 10 Years c) 2 Years

195 Th~ validity of medical for a CPL is

a) 2 years One year~ 5 yearsI

196 You are about to board your aircraft as PIC Your license can be checked by

a) The District Magistrate b) A customs officer c) A police officer

middotcr None of the above

197 TheRescue coordination centers in India are heaQed by

a) LocaiIAF commander b) One of the local lAFArmyNavy commanders

Controller of aerodromesty 198 On an IFR flight plan in VMC you have an RIT failuremiddot The aCtion is

~ a) Continue strictly as per the flight plan

Continue to destination inVMC Proceed to alternate in VMC

d Land at the nearest suitable aerodrome

199 An aircraft can be detained under which act

8 8a

c) 8b d 8e

bf

200 Navigator is required to be carried on board if

a) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navaid is available-on the route b) for a distance of more than 600 nm no Navigation aid is available within

30 nm either side of the routemiddot

201 All flights arA permitted in which airspace

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 24: Albatross - Regs QB

24

---

shy

-

shyr

shy

-

- lt

~-

shy(

--

-

3) -class 8 -h class C amp0 C) Class EF-lt3shy

aU are correct)iV 202 The C of A is deemed to be lapsed if

a) a modification is made without approval of DGCA b aircraft is involved in an accident c aircraft suffers a major damage

Y all are correct

203 Military personnel can carry arms amp ammunition in an aircraft with the written permission of

~ a) DGCA

central Govt ArmyHQ

d) none of the above

204 An aircraft has forced landed at an aerodrome It can take of again

if the pilot is satisfied after an inspection that the aircraft is air wortfiy~ with the permission of DGCA c) with the permission of commissioner of police d any of the abOve

205 On change of ownership the aircraft

a can fly immediately _

~ can not fly till regis~ered in the name of new owner c) can not fly tilt permission is obtained from central Go~

d) can not fly tilt permissionisobtained from new owner

206 Landing amp housing charges are charged as per the

a) AUW of the aircraft at the time of landing

-br Maximum AUW of the aircraft c) number of persons on board d) navigation facUities used

207 Route guides are required to be carried in

a) all aircraft b) all private aircraft

aircraft involved in scheduled transport services~ 208 The crew of an aircraft should riot consume any alcoholic drinks

within 12 hOUfS before the flight as in 3 amp during flight within 24 hours before the flight

209 Mental patients can not be carried in an aircraft except when

a) certified by an RMP as fit to fly without causing harm to other passengers

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 25: Albatross - Regs QB

b) aceompanled by aft-attendant ---tgtoth are correct~

210 looSe sheets of paper containing printed matter can be dropped(from an aircraft with the permissiof) of

A 3) OM

commissioner of police both are correct

211 In India the IFR amp VFR flights

~ separated from each other not separated

c) not separated but information is given to other aircraft

212 A new flight plan is required to be filed at an

a uncontrolled aerodrome if a flight is delayed by more than 30 minutes controlled aerodrome if a flight is derayed by more than 30 minutes ~ controlled 3erodrome if a flight is delayed by less than 30 minutes

213 Displaced threshold is indicated by

a) white lights in a row b) red lights in a row

green Ii~hts in a row ~ 214 DistressSignalis

dropping of red parachute flares firing of white pyrotechnical fights in

c) firing -of g(een pyrotechnicallights in succession rif

215 Series of projectiles fired at an interval of 10 second~ on bursting showing red 7 green stars or lights indicate

a) aircraft is in distress but no immediate assistancein required b) aircraft is in distress and immediate assistance is required c) aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibiteclaf-ea ~ aircraft is flying over or in the vicinity of a prohibited area restricted --

are-a or danger area

216 Weather minima VMCbelow 3000 feet in a controlled air apace is

~ a) visibility 8 Km

visibility 5 Km visibility 15 Km

d) visibility 300 meters 217 While taking off from the same RIW or parallel RIW at less than 760 meters apart a

light or a medium aircraft taking off behind a heavy aircraft the separaljon minima Is

2 minutes

~ 3 minutes c) 5 minufp

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 26: Albatross - Regs QB

-

26

218 Which aircraft maybe on a collision coirrse

~ aircraft on the right with red navigation light in sight aircraft on the left with red navigatiotl light in sight

c) aircraft on the right with white navigation light in sight

219 The green navigation light is visible through

HO deg from forward to therigbt~ 110 deg from forward to the left c) 110 deg from tail to the right d) 140deg

220 A ~ight aircraft departs behind a medium aircraft the time gap between the I~o is -

a) 1 mt 2mts~

c) 3mts --- d) 5mts

221 Cabotage of traffic refers to

operation of a commercial Ale -of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo between two points within thi territory of another contracting state

b) op~tion ofmiddot a commercial Me of a contracting slate to carry passengerscargo between two points outside the territory of another contracting slate

c operation of a commercial A1CQf a cotracting state 10 cSfY passengersCargo to the territory of another C9ntracting state

d) operation of a commercial Me of a contracting state to carry passengerscargo out from the territory of another contracting state

222 Thresh hold is

~ a beginning of the runway

beginning of that part of the runway usabl~ for landing a pOint where taxy ways meet

223 When refueling an aircraft

a No unauthorised person within 15 mtrsbullbull b No naked flame with in bullbull30 Mtrs c No smoking with in 30 Mtrs

224 A red flag on the ATe indicates f1ying in progress

225 To an aircraft a red flag on the ATe indicatesNothing

226 At Bombay over Ma~bar hills flying is not pennitted within a distance of

a) 2nm b) 5Km

~ 1 nm

227 The air space over Mathura refinery is a

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 27: Albatross - Regs QB

27

~ a) restricted area

prohibited area dangerare3

228 A steady white light di~ected towards an aircraft an fight means

a) land at this aerodrome amp proceed to the apron b) landing prohibited c) return tothe starting point

J1 nothing

229 On the ground a red square with two yellqw diagonals means

) ~a) exercise caution while landing b) takeoff is prohibited c) fanding- prohibited

landing prohibited and prohibition is likely to b~~PwJAOwidY 230 letter C in black against yeflow background means

~ a) accident reports to be made here

reports concerning air traffic services to be made here flight plans to be colleded from here

d all the above are correct

231 Two digits in black colour against a yelow back ground di~Iyed yel1iepJlyjndicates

a OOM f5 Direction for take off

c Wind direction shyd) OOR for landing

232 An aircraft can fly over danger area

Above flight level 290 ~ If cleared by ATC

c) Unrestricted

233 Tokyo Conven~ion is valid for

4 AU International flights b) All dO(l1estic flights cgt All local flights

234 The authority to detain an aircraft is given in

~ a) Rule 8 of rules 1957

Act 8 of aircraft Act 1934 Rule 8 C Aircraft rules 1937

d) Rule 8 0 of aircraft Act 1934

235 The threshold of the Runway is

a) The point where the aircraft lines up

That point in the beginning of the Runway used for landing

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 28: Albatross - Regs QB

28

c) The beginning-efihe Runway

2360 A report received from an aircraft giving its regular position andlor met report is called

a) Met report b) Position report

Air report~

237 A stepoundldy red light projected to an aircraft in flight means give way to other aCT donT land for the time being

238 A steady green light projected to an aircraft on the grounqair means clear to take off-

239 A cross with a Single co1spicuous colour preferaoly white on the maneuvering area meansarea unfit for use by aircraft

24b During flight as a pilot you are subjected to unlawful interference in discharging your duties On SSR you should endeavor to set

Af 7500 mode A b) 7600 mode A c) 7500 modeC d) 7700 mode C

241 On an IFR flight plan but in VMlt you have communication failure you should

~ Maintain VMC amp land at the most convenient aerodrome lt b) Maintain VMC amp land at the nearest aerodrome

c) Proceed according to flight plan

242 The airspace set up as a corridor where navigation aids are available is called

ft Airway b) Controlled airspace c) Radar airspace

- ~ 243 The transition altitude is laid down by

a) TheATC b) The Pilot

The State~ 244 Above what heightthe flight levels are to be used in India

4000 feet ~ 3000 feet

c) 5500 feet d) 6500 feet

245 A fresh flight plan is 10 be filedif a scheduled flight is delayed by more than

a) One hour

AJ 30 minutes c Always irrespective of the time delay

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 29: Albatross - Regs QB

246 A temporary change concerning operationaf matter is notified in

a AlP - ~ Notams

Ale

247 The air designator rar wond wide ATS routes are in which colour

~ a) White b) Red amp Green

-Red Green Blue amp Ambeuror Red Green Blue Amber amp White

24U rile air designator for domestIc ATS routes are in which cololll

~ White Red amp Green

c) Red Green Blue amp Amber d) Red Green Blue Amber amp White

249 A change in operational status or an aeronautic facility whichasls for more than two J

hours is issued under which series of NOriMS

Series AJ4fb) Series 8 c) Series C d) Series 0

250 For FDTL theflying time of training flights is

a) accounted b) Not counted c) Partially counted d) Counted only if combined wth a scheduled flight

251 FOT L limitations for the flight crew on domestic flights is

a) 8 hrs - lt

i

~ q) 9 hrs

10 hrs 11 hrs

252 The minimum time separation for a light aircraft to land behind a heavy aircraft is

~ a) 2 minutes

3 minutes 5 minutes

TIfS Trut Ai- SpQ ~ 253 The ATC is to be notified if during a flight the TAS changes by more than

5 0- 10 kb A

b) 10 c) 20

254 Aircraft flying on the same track should have a minimum separation of

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 30: Albatross - Regs QB

- -

a) 15 minfles b 10 minlftesshyc) 5 minutes d) 20 minutes

255 Which type of airspace exist in India

a) Class A -b Class 0 amp F c) Class 0 ampF c) Class B C 0 amp F

256_ You will report an air miss when

a) Yousee an aircraft at same flight level b You see an aircraft at close proximity with no risk ofcollision

You see an aircraft at close proximity and you think there was a risk of -

Y collision

257 All records associated with defects amp their rectification are required to be preserved for a period of

One year Two years

c) Till the aircraft is phased out of servic (z-h-+ de bs i ~- - ~lt - - ~ lt

258_ C of A will cease to be valid if shy

~ a) _Aircraft is engaged in unauthorized operations

Aircraft suffers from a major damage or defect There isa chimge of ownership

d) All are correct

259 All defects observed during flight are to b~ reported

a) SO~)I) after the flight- shyb) After the last flight of the day in case or training aircraft making a series 61

flights in a single day unless a serious defect occurs Both are correct

260 Fire extinguishers are carried in an aircr~ft cabin

a) To extinguish cabin fire b) To extinguish electrical fire

Because it is required under the regulations - ~

261 FOR has a record of operation of preceding

25 hours

~ 5 hours c) 30 mls d) Flight

262 FOR is mandatory for

r a) All aircraft

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 31: Albatross - Regs QB

31

Aircraft witbAUW exceedirlg 21000 Kg Aircraft with AUW exceeding 5700 Kg

263 The colour of the FOR is

~

a Black b) Bightyelfow

Bright orange Either b or c

264 The CVR has the capability of recording information

a) One hour or more ~ At least 30 minutes e) The preceding Hight

265 The FOR is fitted in an aircraft to

a) Monitor the performance of the aircraft Help in accident investigation ~

ltC) Both are correct

266 The width of an air way is

a) 20nm

4 40nm 20 nm over land amp 40 nm over sea

267 The jntemational Air Transit agreement was signed by India at Chicago in 1944

268 The Warsaw Convention was held fOf unification of certain rules relating to international c~rriage by air regardingpa~sengerst_ ticketing and baggage etc

269 The operational Control is exercis~d by the

The operator- b) DGCA c Air T raffie Conrol

270 The operational manual is prepared by

a) DGCA b) Operator

Operator amp is approved by the OGCAY 271 An altimeter is set to QNH before landing in order to

~ a) Have clearance between aircraft flying on the circuit

Have cfearance from the obstructions on the ground Reduce the altimeter errors

272 While on a C(OSS country over hilly terrain the minimum clearance required is

2000 feet above the highest obstacle w1th in 5 nm of position of the aircraft

b 2000 feet above the highest obstacle with in 5 nm of the desired track

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 32: Albatross - Regs QB

--0

-0 0

_

0 0

of

0shy

32

c) 1000 feetabove the highestDb-stacle with in 5 nm=of position -ltFfthe aircraft

273 The aircraft public health rul3s were published in which year

a) 1937 1954

~ 1934

274 A flight navigator is require to bemiddot carried on board if if no nav aid is available for 600 nm and within 30 nm of either side of track

274 Mails can be carried in the airCfaft with the permission of

a) OGCA b) OOGCA c ORampr

1 DGPampT

275 Photography at an aerodrome can be allowed with the permission of

DGCA~ OM c) commissioner of poiice

276 ADC clearance is required to be obtained

o a) on across country flight ~ foral( aircraft ope(ating witf1in ADtZ

c when returning to base on the same day d it is not required when returning to base on the same day

o 0

277 Dead body or remains of a person who has died of yellow fever can be brought to India with the permission of

a) health officer b Indian embassy abroad c) central Govt

can not be broughtff

278 The rules for Public health were published in

)lshy 1954 b) 1934 c) 1939 d) 1947

279 The displaced threshord is indicated by

a) white lights green fines~

c red lines d) yellow lines

280 The displaced threshofd is indicated by

0---

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 33: Albatross - Regs QB

33

a) white lights4 green Ughts c) red lights d) yellow lights

281 The end of the WN is indicated by lt

white lignts green lights red lights yellow fights

282 For the purpose of renewal c CPl

50 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC 50 of instrument ilyingisCOunterl3sP1C 80 of co-pilot flying is counted as PIC

283 An aircraft can fly within 10 nm of an airfield This area Is called

restricted cm ~ danger area c) prohibiied area d airfield area

284 Penaltyfor carrying explosives or arms amp giving wrong statements

2 years of imprisonment amp fine ~ 2 years imprisonment c) one year imprisonment amp fine

285 The tertificateofairworthiness is suspended

a) after an accident b) middotafter unauthorised modification have been done c) aircraft suffers a major defect

all correct~)

286 The remains of a crashed aircraft can be tamperedremoved to-

a) extricate personsanimals alive or dead b) clear the RNV to allow air traffic shyc) take it to a place of safety

)9shy all correct

287 After a forced landing an aircraft can TO for base for repair purpose without the permission of the DGCA _ TRUE IFALSE

288 An aircraft coming from Bombay to Derhi lands at Jaipur due to Weather It can TO again without the permission of the DGCA TRUE f FALSE

289 Aircraft flying on the same Track amp level the longitudinal sepafalion is

30 mts)( 15 mts c) 05 mts

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 34: Albatross - Regs QB

34

290 Aircraft flying orFlhe saine Track amp (evel when frequent position fixing is possible the longitudinal separation is

30 mts 15mts 05mts 10 mts

291 At an aerodrome a red square with two yellow diagonals indicates Ianding prohibited and prohibition is likely to last for long

292 A series of green flashes directed towards an aircraft on the ground indicates Clear to land

293 Officers belonging to ArmyNavyAir Force a) can carry aons on board a civil aircraft ~ can not carry anns cn board a civil aircraft

294 An extremely sick person

a) can not be carried on board an aircraft oj can be carried on board an aircraft pr- can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant amp

certified by a registered medical practitioner

295 The reciprocal tracks on a semicircular system below FL 290 have vertical clearance of

a) 500 feet 1000 feet~ c) 2000 feet

296 In India the semcircular system starts from FL

~ 150 b 170

c) 290 d) 160

297 The Runway direction is measured with respect to

True North

~ Magnetic North c) Compass North d Grid North

a shy

middot298 A red flag on top of ATC building means

a) Do not land b) Do not lake off

Flying in progress~ 299 Longitudinal separation between two aircraft lying at the level using DME is

a) 200m

-

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 35: Albatross - Regs QB

35

b 10 nm if the preceding aircraft is flying at a T A~r more iasler than fhe aircraft behind Both are correct

300 In India the controlled airspaces are designated as

~ Class 0 Class B

c) Class C

301 The met minma is proviqed by the

Operator~ b) Manufacturer c) Controller of aerodromes d) OGCA

302 For class I Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast is

3 hrs ~ 12 hrs

c) 18 to 24 hrs d) 12 to 24 hrs

303 For class III Met office the minimum notice required for a route forecast for domestic flights is

a 3 hrs b) 12 hrs

Bto 24 hrs ~ 12 to 24 hrs

304 The Tokyo convention Act 1975 applies [0

~ a All aircraft

The whole of India j1 y where in the wond

305 The aircraft rules 1937 apply ro

a) The whole of India b) All aircraft registered in India where ever these are flying amp all persotrS on

board these aircraft c) AIlaircraft when flying over India amp all persons on board

AU are correct ~

306 The act rules dealing with puIic health is

~ a) Public health rules 1954

Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1954 Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1937

d) Aircraft (Public Health) Rules 1945

307 ATe provides which of the following

a Advisory service

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 36: Albatross - Regs QB

36

~ Contro of air trafficmiddot c Beuch amp resette d) All are correct

vmiddot 308 Minimum visibility aerodrome equipped with radio aids --

27 km~ b) 37km c) 5km d) 15km-~

J09 Minimum visibility aerodrome not equipped with radio aids

a) 27 km 37 kme(~- 5km

d) 15 km

310 For the purpose of having additional aircraft in the aircraft rating of the license The trainin~ flying shoufd be carried

With in 5 nm of the aerodrome Within the local flying area of the aerodrome j1 Any where in India All are corr~ct

311 The maximum number of hours a pilot can fly in 30 days is

125 hrs as PIC ~ 125 hrs PIC or Co-pilot c) 150 hrs 15 minutes

J (~ r ~12 At an aerodrome special VFR may be authorised when

~vis~omty falls b~low 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feetmiddot Visibility falls below 8 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1500 feet

c) VISibility falls below 5 Km or cloud ceiling is less than 1000 feet

313 The dead body of a person who has died due to Cholera can be brought in to India with the permission of

-Indian foreign mission abroad b) DGCA c) Central Govt

~

314 At an aerodrome a red square with a yellow diagonal means

-lt

~ a) Landing prohibited

Exercise caution when approaching to land amp when landing Caution more than one direction being used for all Take Offs amp Landings

315 An extremely sick person

a) Can not be carried on board an aircraft Y Can be carried on board an aircraft if accompanied by an attendant

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 37: Albatross - Regs QB

38

325 Minimum lateral separation between aircraft climbing through the level of another aircraft holding over a navigation aid is

a) 5nm b) ~ minutes

Af 15 nm (5 minutes longitudinal separation)

326 On Take Off the aircraft is ~nsferred from aerodrome control to approach control

~

a) Once the aircraft is in clouds b When 15nm from the aerodrome

In the vicinity of the aerodrome When lined up for take oft

327 Minimum DME separation aircraft flying on the same track amp same direction is lt

a) 10nm 4 20nm

c) middot10 minutes

328 An aircraft is frying Oil rragneUc ccurse (Tr) 180 In a quadrantal system it would be crmiddot

flying

a Odd thousand feet Even thousand feet~

Odd thousand + 500 feet d) Even thousand + 500 feet

329 The facilities avail~ble at an airfield will be mentioned in

~ AlP b) AIRAC c) AIC d) NOTAMS

v130 An aircraft at supersonic speed can fly over India

v a) With pennission of Central Govt b With the permission of OGCA

Can not fly

331 An aircraft is aescending oVer Delhi aerodrome from Flight level 290 The altimeter reads 12000 ieeL The pilot will report vertical distance as fltltd lej

~

a) 12000 feet b) Flight level 120

Flight level 290 29000 feet

332 VMC exists at an aerodrome when visibility is more than

~ 8Km SKm

c 3Km

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 38: Albatross - Regs QB

39

333 UTe means

~ Coordinated universal time Universal coordinated time

c Universal time coordinated

334 The runway direction is measured with respect to

a True North Magnetic North~

c) Compass North fmiddot

~rr j v335 While in a circuit an aircraft experiences RT failure the pilot should acknowledge RT

signals by

a Pitching the nose UplOown b) Rocking wings cy Switching ONOFF (anding lights

lt p ty-

-Jmiddot 0 36 Petroleum in bulk means Petroleum contained in receptacles

a) Of 900 liters capacity ~ Exceeding 900 liters capacity

c) Less than 900 liters capacity

337 A red pyrotechnicallight fired from control tower in front of an aircraft means

Keep circling amp give way to other ainraft Not with standing with the previous instructions do not land for the time being

c) Nothing

va38 The incubation period for relapsing fever is

a) B days b 6 days c) 4 days

339 During night flying if navigation lights fail the pilot should

a) Send a MAY day signal b Land at the altemate aerodrome c land as soon as possible

340 When flying within transition layer the altitude is reported on

a) OFE b) QNH c) ONE

Not reported at all ~ ~ Minimum Longitudinal separation in terms of time when passing through the level of

another aircraft on the same track from the time the level is crossed is

a) 5 minutes

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 39: Albatross - Regs QB

40

~ b 10 minutes

15 minutes 20 minltes

ft~ ~f fl4ltgt~~ The FOR should be capable of recording the conversatior for at least preceding

a) 25 Hrs b) 5 Hrs cltlmiddot~J Un-uz loLbJfL ~d) ol--tlltc) 25 Minutes

30 minutes~ PO f- s fP-t-v~ ~ L~ b~I~J The-FDTl for international flights in-terms of flying hQurs ampnumber of landings is -

lt1 93 84

c) 63 d 94

I- ~j-i ~ V vJ4~( Hypoxia is a result of which of the fonowing conditions

4 Insufficient oxygen reaching the brain b) Excessive carbon dioxide in the blood stream c) Limited oxygen reaching the heart musdes

345 What causes hypoxia

a) Excessive carbon dioxide in the atmOsphere b) An increase in the nitrogen contentS In the atmosphere afhign altitudes

Y A decrease

in the oxygen partial pressure

346 A loss of cabin pressure mayresult in hypoXia because as cabin altitude increases

a) The percentage of nitrogen in the air is jncreased by The percentage of oxygen in the air is decreased

YV Oxyg~n partial pressure is decre~sed

7 What is the symptom of carbon mono oxide poisoning

a) Rapid shallow breathing b Pain amp cramping of the hands amp feet

fl Dizziness

348 What is the effect of alcohol consumption on the function of body

~ Alcohol has adverse effect especially as the altitude increases b) Small amounts of alcohol in the human system increases judgment amp

decision making ability c) AlcohOl has little effect if followed by equal quantities of black coffee

-349 What is the common symptom of hyperventilation

lt Tingiing of the hands amp feet b) Increased vision keenness c Decreased breathing rate

350 What would most likely to occur In hyperventilation

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 40: Albatross - Regs QB

41

~ A stressful sr~ation causing anxiety The excessive-consumption of alcohol

c)middot An extremely slow rate of breathing amp insufficient oxygen

351 Scanning procedure for effective collision avoidance should constitute

Looking outside for 15 seconds then inside for 5 seconds then repeat 1 minute inside scanning then One minute outside scanning then repeat looking out side every 30 seconds except in radar contact when outside scanning is unnecessary

352 What is the most eff~ctive way to use eyes during night flying

a) Look only at far away dim lights raquof Scan slowly to permit off center viewing c) Concentrate directly on each object for few seconds

353 Which observed target aircraft would be of most concern with respect to collision avoidance

a) One which appears to be ahead and moving from left to right at high speed DL--- One which appears to be ahead and moving from right to left at slowspeed euroJ One which appears to be ahead witt) no lateral amp vertical displacement amp

is increasing in size

354 When making a ling over a darkened or featureless terrain such as water or snow pilot should be aware of the possibility of illusion This ltlpproach may appear to be

ar High middotb) low

c) Shallow

355 Haze can give illusion that the aircraft is

l-- Closet to the runwaYthan it actually is DI Farther from the runway than actually is

c) The same distance from the runway as there is no restriction to visibility

356 A sudden penetration of fog can give an illusion of

Pitching up~ b) Pitching down c) leveliog off

357 Rain on the wind screen can cause what illusion

a) No illusion lower than actual

~ Higher than actual

358 The body of a person died of yellow fever can be brought to Indil if

a) The body is hermetically sealed b) The body is sealed in a zinc box

Can not be Qrought to India~

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 41: Albatross - Regs QB

42

359 Anti collision light is mandatory to be frtted on aircraft A~more than -~ I ( t a 1500 Kg 1- ( c ~- r ~middoti)middott5--middot

~ 5700 Kg (~l J 1t D bull middotIt6000 Kg

360 Either arm amp hand level with shoulder hand across throat palm downwards - means

Cut engines Tum to the direction in which hand is pointing Slow down ampstop

361 Unidirectional green lights are arranged at

a) The beginning of the runway j1( The displaced threshold c) The end of the runway

362 From the beginning of the runway to the displaCe1rthreshofd the runway edge Irghts are

K a) White

Red c) Green d) Yellow

363 During flight a red lIght seen on a Relative bearing of 270 means

A risk of Collision with another aircraft No_riskof collision with another aircraft middotAn aerodrome beaconindicating unsafe conditions

364 A Control zone is

a) An airspace with in which air traffic is controlfed

W A controlled airspace extendirg upwards from the sUrface of the earth to a specific upper limit

c) A controlied airspace extending upwards from a specified upper limit above the earth

36S When using earths horizon as a reference to determine the relative position of other aircraft most concern would be for aircraft

a) Above the horizon amp increasing in size b) On the horizon with little relative movement

7 t~_- z J~ ~On the horizon amp increasing in size ( _(0 p

t

I 366 When making an approach on narrower than usual runway without VASI assistance the pilot should be aware that the approach

~ a) Altitude may be higher tharY it appears

Approach attitude may be lower than it appears May result in leveling off too high amp landing hard

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 42: Albatross - Regs QB

43

-367-- The maximum number of h~rs a pilot can fly as PIC in one~ear

~ 1000 b) 1500 c) 125

368 Instrument flying lime means

a Flying time during night~r Y The time during which the pilot is flying solely with reference to

instruments without any external visual reference c) The time during which the pilot is flying with reference to instruments with

external visual reference

--- ~ shy

369 In the semicircular system the track separation is

a) 000 - 175 amp 180 - 356 000 -179 amp 180 - 359 ~

c 001 - ISO amp 181 - 360 d) 000 -179 amp 181 - 359

370 When on a cross country a delay of ETA more than is to be reported to ATC

~ 5 minutes b) 10 minutes c) 15 minutes

371 An aircraft can cross A TS route with precautions such as

f a) At an angle of 60 degreesW At an angle of 90 degrees c) At an altitude not more than 1000 feet from the cruising altitude

372 When flying over a crash site a pilot will acknowledge the signs from the survivorsQY

~ Rocking wings b) low pass over the crash site c) Reporting to ATC

373 The sign from a crash site indicating that assistance required is shy

a) X

~e d C

- 374 Aerodrome control service is provided in

a) Circuit Control zone~

c Control area d) All the above

375 Met minima forVFRflights above 3000 feet AMSL is

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 43: Albatross - Regs QB

44

Vtsibifiy 8 Km Dis~ce from cOuds 15 Km l1gtrizontaUy amp 300 M Vertically

b) Visibility 8 nm Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 M Vertically c) Visibility 5 Km Distance from clouds 15 Km Horizontally amp 300 MVertically

376 For civil aerodromes the colour of the rotating beacon is

White White amp Green White amp Blue

~77 To cross an ATS route Permission is to be obtain~d minimum

a( 10 minutes before crossing b) 15 minutes before crossing c) 30 minutes before crossing

378 For domestic flights minimum distance from the international border is

a) 5nm 10nm

~ 15 nm

The refueling operation should be stopped if a jet aircraft starts to run up its engines within a distance of

~ 43 meters b) 141 meters c 15 meters

380 The light aircraft departing behind a mediumairciaft the minimum time difference is

2mts b) 3mts c) 5mts

middotaf

381 An aircraft can be detained under

a( Aircraft act 1934 b) Aircraft act rules 1937 c) Aircraft act rules 1934

382 The facilities provided by A TC in aerodrome control are

~ Control b) Traffic c) Search amprescu~

d) All the above are correct

y 383 An aircraft is flying at 5000 feet in IMG It should fly according to

Semicircular system Quadrental system

c) Retum back to base

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 44: Albatross - Regs QB

45

384 Rules regarding demolitioA-Of obstructions cau~ct by tall btlildjng~Jrees etc are i(id down in-

Aircraft rules 1937~ b Aircraft rules 1934 c) Airaaft act 1934 d) Airaaft public health rules 1954

385 Before a flight who is responsible to check the pro~r working of the radio apparatus

r PIC b) Co pilot c) Radio officer

- 086 Night flying corresponds to flying between

a) Half he before sunset to half hr after sunrise

~ Half he after sunset to half hr_ after sunrise Half hr aftersunset to half hr before sunrise

d) Half hr before sunset to half hr after sunrise

-387 If a passenger on board the aircraft is suffering from an illness PIC is to inform health officer _ hours before landing

~ 2 b) 3 c) 4

388 The punishmentforcarriage of unauthorised arms-amp ammunition in the aircraft is

a) Maximum 3 months imprisonment or fine of Rs 10001 or bltgtth b) Maximum 6 months imprisonment or fine of Rs10001 or both c) Maximum2 monthS imprisonment or fine of Rs 5001 or both

~ Maximum_ 2 years punishment and fine shy

389 For aircraft flying over India enroute navigaUo~sed on

a) The duration amp length of flight b) The Duration of stay

- Maximum AUW of the aircraft~ 390 A pilot involved in an accident can fly again

a) After a medical examination b) When asked by the operator to fly-

When cleared by the OGCA 5--39middot1 The area of 10 km around Mathura refinery is termed as

~ Danger area Prohibited area

c) Protected area d) Restricted area

392 An aircraft can fly over a danger area

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 45: Albatross - Regs QB

46

a)

~ If a NOTAM is issued thant is oor-active

b) With the permission of ATe Out side the stipulated time Can not fly at all

393 Around Malabar hill the flying is prohibited Within

~ ommiddotFrom the tower of silence 1 nm From the tower of silence S nm From the tower of silence 2 nm From the tower of silence

394 VFR io a control zone is terminated if visibility falls below

a) 8 Km t~

~ SKm

1SKm d) 3 tan

In a controfled airspace the VFR flights WiH -be--terfflinated if the cloud ceilingmiddotmiddotfalls ~~w -~

a) 1000 feet 1500 feet~ c) 5000 feet

d) 1500 meters

396 The c~rtificate ofairworthiness lap~es when

An aircraft suffers a major damage~ b) If an authorised flying is done c) If an authorised people are carried on board d) All are correct

397 The air report contains which of the folowinp

a) Air temperature TUrbUlence Surface wiiiltfamp-airera1t1cing b) Turbulence upper winds amp surface temperature f( Air temperature Turtwlenc~ Upperw~~amp8ir-eraft Icing d) All are correct - -------

-1398 The minimum ri~~te altitude when flying over hilly terrain is shy

1000 feet ~ 2000 feet

c) 500 feet

099 A risk of oollisjon exists if you see a red navigation light of another aircraft

a) On the port side by On the starboard side c) Both poet amp starboard side

400 The controlled airspace in the confluence of ATS routes is called

-J

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV

Page 46: Albatross - Regs QB

47

a Approach contiol b) Area control c Control areaV